You are on page 1of 179

Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:

Model #: 1 E 1 - A D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - Y N 2 D 1 B B - 024
1 DRJ 8-Jan-2019
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-01-001 LG-271/LS-271/LS-271

Magnetic Level Indicator Description


6 Material Selection: 304/304L with Carbon Steel Flanges
1. Chamber Top: Dome Cap
1
2. Chamber Bottom: Flanged,150# RFWN w/ Blind
3. Chamber Pipe: 2" SCH 10
3 4. Process Connections: Side/Side, 2" 150# RFWN Flange / 5. SCH 40 Pipe, (Reducer)
6. Vent Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug
A
C 7. Drain Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug
8. Gasket: 2" 150#, Flexible GPH Ring
9. Bolting: 5/8" x 3-1/4", 304 SS, A193 B8, CL2 / A194 GR 8
10. Insulation: None

VISUAL Float: Titanium 10.04'' Overall Length 0 0 7 - 1 B B B - 1 2 0


5 4 C-C INDICATION Indicator: Yellow/Black Flags, Percent I N D - F E 1 S - 1 2 1 - 4 A - 024
LENGTH Eclipse Transmitter:
Eclipse Probe:
Jupiter Transmitter:
Jupiter Probe:
Level Switch: (2) Per Unit O E S - A 1 1 C - 0 0 1

C Dimensions ± 1/8 IN [3 MM] unless otherwise specified


Visual Indication Range (VIL): 24 IN 60.96 CM 609.6 MM
B Center-to-Center (C-C): 24 IN 60.96 CM 609.6 MM
A = 7'' [178] E= #N/A #N/A J= # #VALUE!
Spring Lengths
9 B = 10'' [254] F= # #VALUE! K= # #VALUE!
C = 5'' [127] G= # #VALUE! M= # #VALUE! Top = 2.75'' [70]
2 D = #N/A #N/A H= # #VALUE! N= # #VALUE! Bottom = 2.00'' [51]

8
Process & Design Information
[Upper] [SG]
7 Media:
Approx. Dry Weight: [Lower] [SG] NAPHTHA 0.73

CMTR X-RAY/DP IBR INDUSTRIAL GRADE Measurement Type: Total Level


NACE MR0175 PMI [XRF] PED INSPECTION REQUIRED Pressure: [Operating] [Design] 30 30 PSIG
NACE MR0103 PMI [OES] PAINTING POST WELD HEAT TREAT Temperature: [Operating] [Design] 150 150 °F
The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 1 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 1 E 1 - A D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - Y N 2 D 1 B B - 024
1 DRJ 8-Jan-19
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-01-001 LG-271/LS-271/LS-271

ORDER NOTES REVISION NOTES


TWO OES SWITCHES (NOT SHOWN) LOCATED 6" ABOVE CL OF BOTTOM PC AND 6" REV 1
BELOW CL OF TOP PC - TAGS CORRECTED

The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 2 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 2 E 3 - B D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 C 2 D E E B - 018
1 DRJ 8-Jan-2019
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-02-001 LG-196/LIT-196

Magnetic Level Indicator Description


Material Selection: 304/304L with Carbon Steel Flanges
1. Chamber Top: Flanged,300# RFWN w/ Blind
2. Chamber Bottom: Flanged,300# RFWN w/ Blind
180° 3. Chamber Pipe: 4" SCH 10

H
4. Process Connections: Side/Side, 2" 300# RFWN Flange / 5. SCH 40 Pipe
INDICATOR 6. Vent Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug
2" X 1" CPLG RDCR
7. Drain Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug

6 9 8. Gasket: 4" 300#, Flexible GPH Ring


6"
9. Bolting: 3/4" x 4-1/2", 304 SS, A193 B8, CL2 / A194 GR 8
1
10. Insulation: Blanket, Chamber and Flanges, up to 500°F (260°C)

8
3

A Float: Titanium 10.29'' Overall Length 0 0 7 - 1 B E B - 1 2 0


C Indicator: Yellow/Black Flags, Percent I N D - F E 1 S - 4 2 1 - 4 A - 018
Eclipse Transmitter: Integral Mount 7 0 6 - 5 1 1 A - 3 1 0
Eclipse Probe: Coaxial GWR Probe X 7 A D - 4 1 0 0 - A 2 N - 2 0 - 0 3 9
Jupiter Transmitter: X X X - X X X X - X X X
VISUAL Jupiter Probe: 0 2 X X - X X X X - X X X - X X - X X X
5 4 C-C INDICATION
Level Switch: (2) Per Unit E A 1 1 C
LENGTH

Dimensions ± 1/8 IN [3 MM] unless otherwise specified


Visual Indication Range (VIL): 18 IN 45.72 CM 457.2 MM
C Center-to-Center (C-C): 18 IN 45.72 CM 457.2 MM
B
A = 9'' [229] E= #N/A #N/A J= # #VALUE!
Spring Lengths
B = 10'' [254] F= # #VALUE! K= # #VALUE!
9
C = 4.75'' [121] G= # #VALUE! M= # #VALUE! Top = 5.75'' [146]
2 D = #N/A #N/A H= ~25.75'' [654] N= # #VALUE! Bottom = 1.75'' [44]

Process & Design Information


8
7
[Upper] [SG]
Media:
Approx. Dry Weight: [Lower] [SG] KEROSENE 0.66

CMTR X-RAY/DP IBR INDUSTRIAL GRADE Measurement Type: Total Level


NACE MR0175 PMI [XRF] PED INSPECTION REQUIRED Pressure: [Operating] [Design] 40 40 PSIG
NACE MR0103 PMI [OES] PAINTING POST WELD HEAT TREAT Temperature: [Operating] [Design] 450 450 °F
The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 1 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 2 E 3 - B D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 C 2 D E E B - 018
1 DRJ 8-Jan-19
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-02-001 LG-196/LIT-196

ORDER NOTES REVISION NOTES


ECLIPSE: REV 1
X= PROBE LENGTH EXTENDED FOR 2" NPT CONNECTION - TAGS CORRECTED

The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 2 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 2 E 3 - B D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 C 2 D E E B - 093
1 DRJ 8-Jan-2019
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-03-001 LG-222/LIT-222

Magnetic Level Indicator Description


Material Selection: 304/304L with Carbon Steel Flanges
1. Chamber Top: Flanged,300# RFWN w/ Blind
2. Chamber Bottom: Flanged,300# RFWN w/ Blind
180° 3. Chamber Pipe: 4" SCH 10

H
4. Process Connections: Side/Side, 2" 300# RFWN Flange / 5. SCH 40 Pipe
INDICATOR 6. Vent Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug
2" X 1" CPLG RDCR
7. Drain Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug

6 9 8. Gasket: 4" 300#, Flexible GPH Ring


6"
9. Bolting: 3/4" x 4-1/2", 304 SS, A193 B8, CL2 / A194 GR 8
1
10. Insulation: Blanket, Chamber and Flanges, up to 500°F (260°C)

8
3

A Float: Titanium 10.29'' Overall Length 0 0 7 - 1 B E B - 1 2 0


C Indicator: Yellow/Black Flags, Percent I N D - F E 1 S - 4 2 1 - 4 A - 093
Eclipse Transmitter: Integral Mount 7 0 6 - 5 1 1 A - 3 1 0
Eclipse Probe: Coaxial GWR Probe X 7 A D - 4 1 0 0 - A 2 N - 2 0 - 1 1 4
Jupiter Transmitter: X X X - X X X X - X X X
VISUAL Jupiter Probe: 0 2 X X - X X X X - X X X - X X - X X X
5 4 C-C INDICATION
Level Switch: (2) Per Unit E A 1 1 C
LENGTH

Dimensions ± 1/8 IN [3 MM] unless otherwise specified


Visual Indication Range (VIL): 93 IN 236.22 CM 2362.2 MM
C Center-to-Center (C-C): 93 IN 236.22 CM 2362.2 MM
B
A = 9'' [229] E= #N/A #N/A J= # #VALUE!
Spring Lengths
B = 10'' [254] F= # #VALUE! K= # #VALUE!
9
C = 4.75'' [121] G= # #VALUE! M= # #VALUE! Top = 5.75'' [146]
2 D = #N/A #N/A H= ~25.75'' [654] N= # #VALUE! Bottom = 1.75'' [44]

Process & Design Information


8
7
[Upper] [SG]
Media:
Approx. Dry Weight: [Lower] [SG] KEROSENE 0.66

CMTR X-RAY/DP IBR INDUSTRIAL GRADE Measurement Type: Total Level


NACE MR0175 PMI [XRF] PED INSPECTION REQUIRED Pressure: [Operating] [Design] 40 40 PSIG
NACE MR0103 PMI [OES] PAINTING POST WELD HEAT TREAT Temperature: [Operating] [Design] 450 450 °F
The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 1 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 2 E 3 - B D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 C 2 D E E B - 093
1 DRJ 8-Jan-19
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-03-001 LG-222/LIT-222

ORDER NOTES REVISION NOTES


ECLIPSE: REV 1
X= PROBE LENGTH EXTENDED FOR 2" NPT CONNECTION - TAGS CORRECTED

The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 2 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 2 E 5 - B D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 D 2 D E E B - 024
1 DRJ 8-Jan-2019
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-04-001 LG-193/LIT-193

Magnetic Level Indicator Description


Material Selection: 304/304L with Carbon Steel Flanges
1. Chamber Top: Flanged,300# RFWN w/ Blind
2. Chamber Bottom: Flanged,300# RFWN w/ Blind
180° 3. Chamber Pipe: 4" SCH 10
H
4. Process Connections: Side/Side, 2" 300# RFWN Flange / 5. SCH 40 Pipe
INDICATOR 6. Vent Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug
6 9

7. Drain Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug


1
8. Gasket: 4" 300#, Flexible GPH Ring
9. Bolting: 3/4" x 4-1/2", 304 SS, A193 B8, CL2 / A194 GR 8
8
3
10. Insulation: Blanket, Chamber and Flanges, up to 1000°F (538°C)

A
C Float: Titanium 10.29'' Overall Length 0 0 7 - 1 B E B - 1 2 0
Indicator: Yellow/Black Flags, Percent I N D - F E 1 S - 4 2 1 - 4 A - 024
Eclipse Transmitter: Integral Mount 7 0 6 - 5 1 1 A - 3 1 0
Eclipse Probe: Coaxial GWR Probe 7 A D - 6 4 0 2 -R 2 N - 2 0 - 0 3 9

VISUAL Jupiter Transmitter: X X X - X X X X - X X X


5 4 C-C INDICATION Jupiter Probe: 0 2 X X - X X X X - X X X - X X - X X X
LENGTH Level Switch: (2) Per Unit E A 1 1 C

Dimensions ± 1/8 IN [3 MM] unless otherwise specified


Visual Indication Range (VIL): 24 IN 60.96 CM 609.6 MM
C Center-to-Center (C-C): 24 IN 60.96 CM 609.6 MM
B A = 9'' [229] E= #N/A #N/A J= # #VALUE!
Spring Lengths
B = 10'' [254] F= # #VALUE! K= # #VALUE!
9
C = 4.75'' [121] G= # #VALUE! M= # #VALUE! Top = 5.75'' [146]
D = #N/A #N/A H= ~19.75'' [502] N= # #VALUE! Bottom = 1.75'' [44]
2

Process & Design Information


8 [Upper] [SG]
7
Media:
Approx. Dry Weight: [Lower] [SG] DIESEL 0.64

CMTR X-RAY/DP IBR INDUSTRIAL GRADE Measurement Type: Total Level


NACE MR0175 PMI [XRF] PED INSPECTION REQUIRED Pressure: [Operating] [Design] 40 40 PSIG
NACE MR0103 PMI [OES] PAINTING POST WELD HEAT TREAT Temperature: [Operating] [Design] 600 600 °F
The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 1 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 2 E 5 - B D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 D 2 D E E B - 024
1 DRJ 8-Jan-19
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-04-001 LG-193/LIT-193

ORDER NOTES REVISION NOTES


REV 1
- TAGS CORRECTED

The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 2 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 2 E 3 - B D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 D 4 4 E M G - 060
1 DRJ 8-Jan-2019
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-05-001 LG-200/LIT-200

Magnetic Level Indicator Description


Material Selection: 304/304L with Carbon Steel Flanges
1. Chamber Top: Flanged,300# RFWN w/ Blind
2. Chamber Bottom: Flanged,300# RFWN w/ Blind
180° 3. Chamber Pipe: 4" SCH 10
H 4. Process Connections: Side/Side, 2" 300# RFWN Flange / 5. SCH 40 Pipe
INDICATOR 6. Vent Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug
2" X 1" CPLG RDCR
7. Drain Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug

6
8. Gasket: 4" 300#, Flexible GPH Ring
6" 9

8 9. Bolting: 3/4" x 4-1/2", 304 SS, A193 B8, CL2 / A194 GR 8


10. Insulation: Blanket, Chamber and Flanges, up to 1000°F (538°C)

Float: Titanium 14.51'' Overall Length 0 0 7 - 1 H M G- 2 1 0


A
C Indicator: Red/Silver Flags, Percent 0 6 1 - F E 1 A - 4 4 1 - 4 B - 060
Eclipse Transmitter: Integral Mount 7 0 6 - 5 1 1 A - 3 1 0
Eclipse Probe: Coaxial GWR Probe X 7 A D - 4 1 0 0 - A 2 N - 2 0 - 0 8 1
Jupiter Transmitter: X X X - X X X X - X X X
Jupiter Probe: 0 2 X X - X X X X - X X X - X X - X X X
VISUAL
5 4 C-C INDICATION Level Switch: (2) Per Unit E A 1 1 C
LENGTH
Dimensions ± 1/8 IN [3 MM] unless otherwise specified
Visual Indication Range (VIL): 60 IN 152.4 CM 1524 MM
Center-to-Center (C-C): 60 IN 152.4 CM 1524 MM
C A = 9'' [229] E= #N/A #N/A J= # #VALUE!
Spring Lengths
B B = 14'' [356] F= # #VALUE! K= # #VALUE!
C = 4.75'' [121] G= # #VALUE! M= # #VALUE! Top = 5.25'' [133]
D = #N/A #N/A H= ~25.75'' [654] N= # #VALUE! Bottom = 2.00'' [51]
2
Process & Design Information
[Upper] [SG]
Media:
Approx. Dry Weight:
7
[Lower] [SG] KEROSENE 0.66

CMTR X-RAY/DP IBR INDUSTRIAL GRADE Measurement Type: Total Level


NACE MR0175 PMI [XRF] PED INSPECTION REQUIRED Pressure: [Operating] [Design] 40 40 PSIG
NACE MR0103 PMI [OES] PAINTING POST WELD HEAT TREAT Temperature: [Operating] [Design] 610 610 °F
The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 1 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 2 E 3 - B D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 D 4 4 E M G - 060
1 DRJ 8-Jan-19
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-05-001 LG-200/LIT-200

ORDER NOTES REVISION NOTES


ECLIPSE: REV 1
X= PROBE LENGTH EXTENDED FOR 2" NPT CONNECTION - TAGS CORRECTED

The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 2 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 2 E 3 - B D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 D 4 4 E M H - 093
1 DRJ 8-Jan-2019
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-06-001 LG-230/LIT-230

Magnetic Level Indicator Description


Material Selection: 304/304L with Carbon Steel Flanges
1. Chamber Top: Flanged,300# RFWN w/ Blind
2. Chamber Bottom: Flanged,300# RFWN w/ Blind
180° 3. Chamber Pipe: 4" SCH 10

H 4. Process Connections: Side/Side, 2" 300# RFWN Flange / 5. SCH 40 Pipe


INDICATOR 6. Vent Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug
2" X 1" CPLG RDCR
7. Drain Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug
8. Gasket: 4" 300#, Flexible GPH Ring
6 9
6"
8
9. Bolting: 3/4" x 4-1/2", 304 SS, A193 B8, CL2 / A194 GR 8
10. Insulation: Blanket, Chamber and Flanges, up to 1000°F (538°C)

Float: Titanium 18.59'' Overall Length 0 0 7 - 1 H M H - 2 1 0


A
Indicator: Red/Silver Flags, Percent 0 6 1 - F E 1 A - 4 4 1 - 4 B - 093
C
Eclipse Transmitter: Integral Mount 7 0 6 - 5 1 1 A - 3 1 0
Eclipse Probe: Coaxial GWR Probe X 7 A D - 4 1 0 0 - A 2 N - 2 0 - 1 1 4
Jupiter Transmitter: X X X - X X X X - X X X
Jupiter Probe: 0 2 X X - X X X X - X X X - X X - X X X
VISUAL
5 4 C-C INDICATION Level Switch: (2) Per Unit E A 1 1 C
LENGTH
Dimensions ± 1/8 IN [3 MM] unless otherwise specified
Visual Indication Range (VIL): 93 IN 236.22 CM 2362.2 MM
Center-to-Center (C-C): 93 IN 236.22 CM 2362.2 MM
C A = 9'' [229] E= #N/A #N/A J= # #VALUE!
Spring Lengths
B B = 18'' [457] F= # #VALUE! K= # #VALUE!
C = 4.75'' [121] G= # #VALUE! M= # #VALUE! Top = 5.25'' [133]
D = #N/A #N/A H= ~25.75'' [654] N= # #VALUE! Bottom = 1.75'' [44]
2
Process & Design Information
[Upper] [SG]
7 Media:
Approx. Dry Weight: [Lower] [SG] DIESEL 0.64

CMTR X-RAY/DP IBR INDUSTRIAL GRADE Measurement Type: Total Level


NACE MR0175 PMI [XRF] PED INSPECTION REQUIRED Pressure: [Operating] [Design] 40 40 PSIG
NACE MR0103 PMI [OES] PAINTING POST WELD HEAT TREAT Temperature: [Operating] [Design] 650 650 °F
The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 1 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: 2 E 3 - B D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 D 4 4 E M H - 093
1 DRJ 8-Jan-19
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-06-001 LG-230/LIT-230

ORDER NOTES REVISION NOTES


ECLIPSE: REV 1
X= PROBE LENGTH EXTENDED FOR 2" NPT CONNECTION - TAGS CORRECTED

The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 2 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: X 2 E 3 - A D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 N 6 D A 9 9 - 095
1 DRJ 8-Jan-2019
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-07-001 LG-254/LIT-254

Magnetic Level Indicator Description


Material Selection: 304/304L with Carbon Steel Flanges
1. Chamber Top: Flanged,150# RFWN w/ Blind
2. Chamber Bottom: Flanged,150# RFWN w/ Blind
H
180° 3. Chamber Pipe: 3" SCH 10

6 9 4. Process Connections: Side/Side, 2" 150# RFWN Flange / 5. SCH 40 Pipe


INDICATOR 6. Vent Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug
1
7. Drain Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug

8
8. Gasket: 3" 150#, Flexible GPH Ring
3
9. Bolting: 5/8" x 3-1/2", 304 SS, A193 B8, CL2 / A194 GR 8

A 10. Insulation: None


C

Float: Titanium 10.04'' Overall Length G 1 F - 0 5 0 0 - 1 0 0


Indicator: Yellow/Black Flags, Percent I N D - F E 1 S - 3 2 1 - 4 A - 095
Eclipse Transmitter: Integral Mount 7 0 6 - 5 1 1 A - 3 1 0
5 4
Eclipse Probe: Coaxial GWR Probe 7 A T - 1 1 0 0 - A 1 0 - 2 0 - 1 0 8
VISUAL Jupiter Transmitter: X X X - X X X X - X X X
C-C INDICATION
LENGTH Jupiter Probe: 0 2 X X - X X X X - X X X - X X - X X X
Level Switch: (2) Per Unit E A 1 1 C
C F

Dimensions ± 1/8 IN [3 MM] unless otherwise specified


Visual Indication Range (VIL): 95 IN 241.3 CM 2413 MM
Center-to-Center (C-C): 94.75 IN 240.665 CM 2406.7 MM
C A = 7'' [178] E= #N/A #N/A J= # #VALUE!
B
Spring Lengths
B = 10'' [254] F= 40.125'' [1019] K= # #VALUE!
9
C = 4.5'' [114] G= # #VALUE! M= # #VALUE! Top = 0.75'' [19]
2
D = #N/A #N/A H= ~13.76'' [350] N= # #VALUE! Bottom = 4.75'' [121]

8
Process & Design Information
[Upper] [SG] NAPHTHA 0.73
7
Media:
Approx. Dry Weight: [Lower] [SG] WATER 1.0

CMTR X-RAY/DP IBR INDUSTRIAL GRADE Measurement Type: Interface Level


NACE MR0175 PMI [XRF] PED INSPECTION REQUIRED Pressure: [Operating] [Design] 30 30 PSIG
NACE MR0103 PMI [OES] PAINTING POST WELD HEAT TREAT Temperature: [Operating] [Design] 150 150 °F
The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 1 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: X 2 E 3 - A D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 N 6 D A 9 9 - 095
1 DRJ 8-Jan-19
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-07-001 LG-254/LIT-254

ORDER NOTES REVISION NOTES


CHAMBER: REV 1
X= C-C: 94.75" - TAGS CORRECTED
X= ADDITIONAL PC LOCATED 40.125" FROM THE CL OF THE BOTTOM PC

The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 2 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: X 2 E 3 - A D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 N 2 D A B B - 055
1 DRJ 8-Jan-2019
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-08-001 LG-252/LIT-252

Magnetic Level Indicator Description


Material Selection: 304/304L with Carbon Steel Flanges
1. Chamber Top: Flanged,150# RFWN w/ Blind
2. Chamber Bottom: Flanged,150# RFWN w/ Blind
180° 3. Chamber Pipe: 3" SCH 10
H
4. Process Connections: Side/Side, 2" 150# RFWN Flange / 5. SCH 40 Pipe
9 INDICATOR 6. Vent Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug
6

7. Drain Connection: 1/2", FNPT w/ Hex Head Plug


1
8. Gasket: 3" 150#, Flexible GPH Ring
9. Bolting: 5/8" x 3-1/2", 304 SS, A193 B8, CL2 / A194 GR 8
8
3 10. Insulation: None

A
C
Float: Titanium 10.04'' Overall Length 0 0 7 - 1 B B B - 1 2 0
Indicator: Yellow/Black Flags, Percent I N D - F E 1 S - 3 2 1 - 4 A - 055
Eclipse Transmitter: Integral Mount 7 0 6 - 5 1 1 A - 3 1 0
Eclipse Probe: Coaxial GWR Probe 7 A T - 1 1 0 0 - A 1 0 - 2 0 - 0 6 8
VISUAL Jupiter Transmitter: X X X - X X X X - X X X
5 4 C-C INDICATION
Jupiter Probe: 0 2 X X - X X X X - X X X - X X - X X X
LENGTH
Level Switch: (2) Per Unit E A 1 1 C

Dimensions ± 1/8 IN [3 MM] unless otherwise specified


Visual Indication Range (VIL): 55 IN 139.7 CM 1397 MM
C
Center-to-Center (C-C): 54.625 IN 138.748 CM 1387.5 MM
B A = 7'' [178] E= #N/A #N/A J= # #VALUE!
Spring Lengths
9
B = 10'' [254] F= # #VALUE! K= # #VALUE!
C = 4.5'' [114] G= # #VALUE! M= # #VALUE! Top = 3.75'' [95]
2 D = #N/A #N/A H= ~13.76'' [350] N= # #VALUE! Bottom = 2.00'' [51]

Process & Design Information


8
7
[Upper] [SG]
Media:
Approx. Dry Weight: [Lower] [SG] NAPHTHA 0.73

CMTR X-RAY/DP IBR INDUSTRIAL GRADE Measurement Type: Total Level


NACE MR0175 PMI [XRF] PED INSPECTION REQUIRED Pressure: [Operating] [Design] 30 30 PSIG
NACE MR0103 PMI [OES] PAINTING POST WELD HEAT TREAT Temperature: [Operating] [Design] 150 150 °F
The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 1 OF 2
Tag Number(s) Rev: By: Date:
Model #: X 2 E 3 - A D 1 B - B E A A - 1 1 1 1 - 1 N 2 D A B B - 055
1 DRJ 8-Jan-19
Quantity: 1 Serial #: 35398-08-001 LG-252/LIT-252

ORDER NOTES REVISION NOTES


CHAMBER: REV 1
X= C-C: 54.625" - TAG CORRECTED

The information contained within this drawing is confidential and intended only for the client stated below.
Any unauthorized use of this drawing without consent from the client is strictly prohibited.
This is an uncontrolled document once printed.
Dimensional Drawing
(drawing not to scale)
Client Name: VFUELS LLC Orion Ref. # 035398
Client Ref #: 1429 Certified By: TMM
Project Name: Date: 10/25/2018
www.orioninstruments.com - 2105 Oak Villa Blvd, Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70815 (p)225-906-2343 (f)225-906-2344 Toll Free 866-55-ORION (drawing not for construction unless certified) PAGE 2 OF 2
1 EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE
2 Equipment or Protective systems intended for use in Potentially
Explosive Atmospheres - Directive 94/9/EC
3 EC-Type Examination Certificate No: FM14ATEX0041X
4 Equipment or protective system: 706 Eclipse Guided Wave Level Transmitter
(Type Reference and Name)

5 Name of Applicant: Magnetrol International Inc.

6 Address of Applicant: 705 Enterprise Street


Aurora, IL 60504 USA

7 This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this
certificate and documents therein referred to.

8 FM Approvals Ltd, notified body number 1725 in accordance with Article 9 of Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March
1994, certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements
relating to the design and construction of equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given
in Annex II to the Directive.

The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report number:

3051920 dated 6th April 2015

9 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements, with the exception of those identified in item 15
of the schedule to this certificate, has been assessed by compliance with the following documents:

EN 60079-0:2012, EN 60079-1:2007, EN 60079-11:2012, EN 60079-31:2014 and


EN 60529:1991 + A1:2000

10 If the sign ‘X’ is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment is subject to specific
conditions of use specified in the schedule to this certificate.

11 This EC-Type Examination certificate relates only to the design, examination and tests of the specified
equipment or protective system in accordance to the directive 94/9/EC. Further requirements of the Directive
apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment or protective system. These are not covered by
this certificate.

12 The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include:

II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC, IP67


II 2/1 G Ex d/ia [ia IIC Ga] IIB + H2 T6 … T1 Gb/Ga Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC, IP67
II 1/2 D Ex ia/tb [ia Da] IIIC T85ºC … T450ºC Da/Db Ta = -15ºC to +70ºC, IP67

Digitally signed by Mick Gower


DN: cn=Mick Gower, o=FM Approvals, ou,
email=mick.gower@fmapprovals.com,
c=GB
Date: 2015.06.04 13:43:16 +01'00'

Mick Gower
Certification Manager, FM Approvals Ltd.

Issue date: 04th June 2015

THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE
FM Approvals Ltd. 1 Windsor Dials, Windsor, Berkshire, UK. SL4 1RS
T: +44 (0) 1753 750 000 F: +44 (0) 1753 868 700 E-mail: atex@fmapprovals.com www.fmapprovals.com

F ATEX 020 (Apr/14) Page 1 of 4


SCHEDULE
to EC-Type Examination Certificate No. FM14ATEX0041X

13 Description of Equipment or Protective System:


The Model 706 is an Eclipse Wave Radar Level Transmitter, for liquid and bulk solids level control, utilizing
guided wave radar (GWR) technology. Guided Wave Radar functions according to the principal of Time
Domain Reflectometry (TDR). A pulse of electromagnetic energy travels down the probe and is reflected by
the liquid (or bulk solid) surface. The time of pulse travel, down the probe and back to the electronics unit, is
used to determine the distance to the process surface. That distance is used to compute process level, and
control the transmitter output.

The Model 706 is an advanced two-wire transmitter. It uses a nominal input voltage of 24VDC and it
provides an analog 4-20mA signal with HART or Fieldbus digital communication. With the FISCO and
FNICO concepts, the input voltage is limited to 17.5 V. A digital display and keypad are optional. The Model
706 is available with HART Communication as the Model 706-51 and with Fieldbus Communication as the
Model 706-52.

The Model 706 is housed in a dual compartment (die-cast aluminum or investment cast 316SS) enclosure
with separate wiring and electronics compartments. The Model 706 housing is a new design that has been
designed for approval as explosionproof.

The wiring compartment at the top of the transmitter isolates the power/signal conductors from the
electronics compartment beneath it by way of an environmentally sealed feed-through. A quick disconnect
probe coupling eases installation and allows probes to be installed without concern for their orientation to
the transmitter head. Probe mounting can be provided integrally, directly to the electronics housing, or can
be remotely mounted up to 12 feet from the electronics housing.

Model Code structure and relevant parameters:

706-511a-bcd / 7ef-ghij-klm-no-p. Eclipse Level Transmitter / Eclipse Level Probe.


Entity Parameters:
Ui = 28.4V, Ii = 120mA, Pi = 0.84W, Ci = 4.4nF, Li = 2.7ȝH
a = Accessories/mounting A, B, C, 0, 1 or 2.
b = Classification A, B or D.
c = Housing 1 or 2.
d = Conduit connection 0, 1, 2 or 3.
e = Measurement system A or C.
f = Configuration/style D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7.
g = Process connection size 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, B, C, D, E or F.
h = Process connection type 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, M, N, T or U
(h = 1 or 2 with f = D, J or S; h = 9 with f = K).
i = Construction codes 0, K, L, M, N or P.
j = Flange option 0, 1 or 2.
k = Material of construction A, B, C, F, P, Q, R, S or T (k = F only with f = F).
l = Spacer material 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (l = 3 only with f = D).
m = O-ring/seal material 0, 2, 8, A, B, D or N (m = B only with f = G or T).
n = Probe size/flushing connection 0, 1 or 2.
o = Special option 0, 1 or 2.
p = Insertion length (3 digits max) in:
inches (English units e = A, rigid probes f = D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z).
feet (English units e = A, flexible probes f = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7).
centimeters (metric units e = C, rigid probes f = D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z).
meters (metric units e = C, flexible probes f = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7).

THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE
FM Approvals Ltd. 1 Windsor Dials, Windsor, Berkshire, UK. SL4 1RS
T: +44 (0) 1753 750 000 F: +44 (0) 1753 868 700 E-mail: atex@fmapprovals.com www.fmapprovals.com

F ATEX 020 (Apr/14) Page 2 of 4


SCHEDULE
to EC-Type Examination Certificate No. FM14ATEX0041X

706-520a-bcd / 7ef-ghij-klm-no-p. Eclipse Level Transmitter / Eclipse Level Probe.


FISCO Parameters:
Ui = 17.5V, Ii = 380mA, Pi = 5.32W, Ci = 0.5nF, Li = 2.7ȝH
a = Accessories/Mounting: A, B, C, 0, 1 or 2.
b = Classification: A, B or D.
c = Housing Material: 1 or 2.
d = Conduit: 0, 1, 2 or 3.
e = Measurement: A or C.
f = Probe configuration/Style: D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
g = Process connection size: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, B, C, D, E or F.
h = Process connection type: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, M, N, T or U (h =
1 or 2 only with f = F, J, 1, 2, 5 or 7; h = 1, 2, 3, 4, A or B only with f = D, P, S, T or V; h = 5, 6, 7,
8, K, L, M or N only with f = D, J or S; h = 9 only with K).
i = Construction codes: 0, K, L, M, N or P.
j = Flange option: 0, 1, or 2.
k = Material of construction: A, B, C, F, P, Q, R or S (k = F only with f = F).
l = Spacer Material: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (l = 3 only with f = D).
m = O-ring / seal material: 0, 2, 8, A, B, D or N (m = B only with f = G or T).
n = Probe size/Flushing Connection: 0, 1 or 2.
o = Special Option: 0, 1, or 2.
p = Probe Length:
inches (English units e = A, rigid probes f = D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z)
feet (English units e = A, flexible probes f = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7)
centimeters (metric units e = C rigid probes f = D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z).
meters (metric units e = C flexible probes f = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7)

14 Specific Conditions of Use:


1. The enclosure contains aluminum and is considered to present a potential risk of ignition by impact or
friction. Care must be taken during installation.
2. To maintain the T6 … T1 temperature code care shall be taken to ensure the “Enclosure Temperature”
does not exceed 75ºC.
3. The risk of electrostatic discharge shall be minimized at installation, following the directions given in the
instructions.
4. Contact the original manufacturer for information in the dimensions of the flameproof joints.
5. For installation with ambient temperature of 70ºC, refer to the manufacturer’s instruction for guidance on
proper selection of conductors.
6. Provisions shall be made to provide transient overvoltage to a level not to exceed 119Vdc.
7. Temperature codes for the ratings Ex d/ia [ia IIC] IIB+H2 and Ex ia/tb [ia] IIIC are defined by the
following table:
Process temperature(PT) Temperature Code-TCG (GAS) Temperature Code-TCD (Dust)
Up to 75°C T6 TCD= PT+10K=85°C
From 75°C to 90°C T5 TCD= PT+10K=100°C
From 90°C to 120°C T4 TCD= PT+15K=135°C
From 125°C to 185°C T3 TCD= PT+15K=200°C
From 185°C to 285°C T2 TCD= PT+15K=300°C
From 285°C to 435°C T1 TCD= PT+15K=450°C

THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE
FM Approvals Ltd. 1 Windsor Dials, Windsor, Berkshire, UK. SL4 1RS
T: +44 (0) 1753 750 000 F: +44 (0) 1753 868 700 E-mail: atex@fmapprovals.com www.fmapprovals.com

F ATEX 020 (Apr/14) Page 3 of 4


SCHEDULE
to EC-Type Examination Certificate No. FM14ATEX0041X

15 Essential Health and Safety Requirements:


The relevant EHSRs that have not been addressed by the standards listed in this certificate have been identified
and assessed in the confidential report identified in item 8.

16 Test and Assessment Procedure and Conditions:


This EC-Type Examination Certificate is the result of testing of a sample of the product submitted, in
accordance with the provisions of the relevant specific standard(s), and assessment of supporting
documentation. It does not imply an assessment of the whole production.

Whilst this certificate may be used in support of a manufacturer’s claim for CE Marking, FM Approvals Ltd
accepts no responsibility for the compliance of the equipment against all applicable Directives in all
applications.

This Certificate has been issued in accordance with FM Approvals Ltd’s ATEX Certification Scheme.

17 Schedule Drawings

A list of the significant parts of the technical documentation is annexed to this certificate and a copy has
been kept by the Notified Body.

18 Certificate History
Details of the supplements to this certificate are described below:

Date Description

04th June 2015 Original Issue.

THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE
FM Approvals Ltd. 1 Windsor Dials, Windsor, Berkshire, UK. SL4 1RS
T: +44 (0) 1753 750 000 F: +44 (0) 1753 868 700 E-mail: atex@fmapprovals.com www.fmapprovals.com

F ATEX 020 (Apr/14) Page 4 of 4


Blueprint Report
Magnetrol International Inc (1000000020)
Class No 3610
Original Project I.D. 3051920
Certificate I.D. FM14ATEX0041X
Drawing No. Revision Level Drawing Title Last Report Electronic Drawing
094-6067 H Eclipse 4X Digital Board 3051920 Yes (pdf)
094-6068 H Analog Board Eclipse 706 3051920 Yes (pdf)
094-6070 B Display Board Eclipse 706 3051920 Yes (pdf)
094-6072 B Digital Board Foundation Fieldbus 3051920 Yes (pdf)
094-6073 C Wiring Board Eclipse 706 3051920 Yes (pdf)
094-6075 B Foundation Fieldbus Wiring Board Eclipse 706 3051920 Yes (pdf)
099-5072 J System Drawing Model 706 Transmitter 3051920 Yes (pdf)
099-6546 X Model 706 2 Wire Transmitter Explosion Proof / IS 3051920 Yes (pdf)
099-6547 M Model 706 2 Wire Transmitter I.S. 3051920 Yes (pdf)
099-6550 P Foundation Fieldbus Model 706 3051920 Yes (pdf)
57-606 3 Installation and Operating Manual for Eclipse Model 706 3051920 Yes (pdf)

04/06/2015 Page 1 of 1
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY

1. HAZARDOUS LOCATION ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PER CANADIAN REQUIREMENTS


2. Certificate No: FM16CA0111X
3. Equipment: 706 Eclipse Guided Wave Level Transmitter
(Type Reference and Name) Level Transmitter

4. Name of Listing Company: Magnetrol International Inc

5. Address of Listing Company: 705 Enterprise St


Aurora IL 60504
United States
6. The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report number:

3051920 dated 6th April 2015


7. FM Approvals LLC, certifies that the equipment described has been found to comply with the following Approval
standards and other documents:

CSA-C22.2 No. 0.4:2009, CSA-C22.2 No. 0.5:2008, CSA-C22.2 No. 25:2009,


CSA-C22.2 No. 30:2007, CSA-C22.2 No.157:2012, CSA-C22.2No.213:2012;CSA-C22.2 No. 94:2001,
CSA-C22.2 No. 60529:R2010, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-0:2011, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-1:2011,
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.60079-11:2011, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60079-15:2012, ANSI/ISA 12.27.01
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010-1:2009

8. If the sign ‘X’ is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment is subject to specific
conditions of use specified in the schedule to this certificate.
9. This certificate relates to the design, examination and testing of the products specified herein. The FM
Approvals surveillance audit program has further determined that the manufacturing processes and quality
control procedures in place are satisfactory to manufacture the product as examined, tested and Approved.

10. Equipment Ratings:

706-51ab-cde / 7fg-hijk-lmn-op-q. Eclipse Level Transmitter / Eclipse Level Probe.


Intrinsically Safe (Entity) for use in Class I, II and III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G,
Temperature Class T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70°C in accordance with Control Drawing No. 099-5072;

Certificate issued by:

17 October 2016
J. E. Marquedant Date
Manager, Electrical Systems

To verify the availability of the Approved product, please refer to www.approvalguide.com

THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE
FM Approvals LLC. 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike, Norwood, MA 02062 USA
T: +1 (1) 781 762 4300 F: +1 (1) 781 762 9375 E-mail: information@fmapprovals.com www.fmapprovals.com

F 348 (Mar 16) Page 1 of 5


SCHEDULE
Canadian Certificate Of Conformity No: FM16CA0111X

Intrinsically Safe (Entity) for use in Class I, Zone 0, Ex ia IIC, Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40ºC
to +70ºC in accordance with Control Drawing No. 099-5072; Explosionproof-Intrinsically Safe for
Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D, Temperature Class T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70°C; Dustignitionproof for Class
II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G, Temperature Class T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70°C; for use in Class I, Zone 1, Ex
d IIB + H2 with connections to Class I, Zone 0, Ex ia IIC, Temperature Class T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC;
Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D, Temperature Class T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70°C;
for use in Class I, Zone 2, Ex nA IIC with connection to connections to Class I, Zone 0, Ex [ia] IIC, Temperature
Class T4 Ta = -15ºC to +70ºC hazardous locations, indoors and outdoors (Type 4X and IP67); Dual Seal.

706-52ab-cde / 7fg-hijk-lmn-op-q. Eclipse Level Transmitter / Eclipse Level Probe.


Intrinsically Safe (FISCO) for use in Class I, II and III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G,
Temperature Class T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70°C in accordance with Control Drawing No. 099-5072;
Intrinsically Safe (FISCO) for use in Class I, Zone 0, Ex ia IIC, temperature Class T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC;
Explosionproof–Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D, Temperature Class T4 Ta = -40ºC
to +70°C; Dust-ignitionproof for Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G,Temperature Class T4 Ta = -40ºC to
+70°C; for use in Class I, Zone 1, Ex d IIB + H2 with connections to Class I, Zone 0, Ex ia IIC, Temperature
Class T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC; Nonincendive (FNICO) for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D,
Temperature Class T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70°C; for use in Class I, Zone 2, Ex nA IIC with connection to
connections to Class I, Zone 0, Ex [ia] IIC, Temperature Class T4 Ta = -15ºC to +70ºC in accordance with
Control Drawing No. 099-5072; hazardous locations, indoors and outdoors (Type 4X and IP67); Dual Seal.

11. The marking of the equipment shall include:


706-51ab-cde / 7fg-hijk-lmn-op-q. Eclipse Level Transmitter / Eclipse Level Probe.
Class I, II and III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G, T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70°C - 099-5072; Entity; Type
4X, IP67; Dual Seal*
Class I, Division 1, Groups BCD, T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC; Type 4X, IP67; Dual Seal*
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G, Class III, Division 1, T4 Ta = -40°C to +70°C; Type 4X, IP67
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G, T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70°C - 099-5072; Entity; Type 4X, IP67;
Dual Seal*
Class I, Zone 0, Ex ia IIC T4 Gb Ta = -40°C to +70°C - 099-5072; Entity; Type 4X, IP67
Class I, Zone 1, Ex d/ia [ia IIC Ga] IIB+H2 T4 Gb Ta = -40°C to +70°C, Type 4X, IP67
Class I, Zone 2, Ex nA [ia Ga] IIC Gc T4 Ta = -15ºC to +70ºC – 099-5072; Entity; Type 4X, IP67; Dual Seal*
Entity Parameters:
Ui (Vmax) = 28.4V, Ii (Imax) = 120mA, Pi (Pmax) = 0.84W, Ci = 0.5nF, Li = 2.7uH

706-52ab-cde / 7fg-hijk-lmn-op-q. Eclipse Level Transmitter / Eclipse Level Probe.


Class I, II and III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G, T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70°C - 099-5072; FISCO; Type
4X, IP67; Dual Seal*
Class I, Division 1, Groups BCD, T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC; Type 4X, IP67; Dual Seal*
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G, Class III, Division 1, T4 Ta = -40°C to +70°C, Type 4X, IP67
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G, T4 Ta = -40ºC to +70°C - 099-5072; FNICO; Type 4X, IP67;
Dual Seal*
Class I, Zone 0, Ex ia IIC T4 Gb Ta = -40°C to +70°C - 099-5072; FISCO; Type 4X, IP67
Class I, Zone 1, Ex d/ia [ia IIC Ga] IIB+H2 T4 Gb Ta = -40°C to +70°C, Type 4X, IP67
Class I, Zone 2, Ex nA [ia Ga] IIC Gc T4 Ta = -15ºC to +70ºC – 099-5072; FISCO; Type 4X, IP67; Dual Seal*
FISCO Parameters:
Ui (Vmax) = 17.5V, Ii (Imax) = 380mA, Pi (Pmax) = 5.32W, Ci = 0.5nF, Li = 2.7uH
FNICO Parameters:
Ui (Vmax) = 17.5V, Ii (Imax) = 380mA, Pi (Pmax) = 5.32W, Ci = 0.5nF, Li = 2.7uH

THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE
FM Approvals LLC. 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike, Norwood, MA 02062 USA
T: +1 (1) 781 762 4300 F: +1 (1) 781 762 9375 E-mail: information@fmapprovals.com www.fmapprovals.com

F 348 (Mar 16) Page 2 of 5


SCHEDULE
Canadian Certificate Of Conformity No: FM16CA0111X

12. Description of Equipment:

The Model 706 is an Eclipse Wave Radar Level Transmitter, for liquid and bulk solids level control, utilizing
guided wave radar (GWR) technology. Guided Wave Radar functions according to the principal of Time Domain
Reflectometry (TDR). A pulse of electromagnetic energy travels down the probe and is reflected by the liquid (or
bulk solid) surface. The time of pulse travel, down the probe and back to the electronics unit, is used to
determine the distance to the process surface. That distance is used to computed process level, and control the
transmitter output.

The Model 706 is an advanced two-wire transmitter. It uses a nominal input voltage of 24VDC and it provides an
analog 4-20mA signal with HART or Fieldbus digital communication. With the FISCO and FNICO concepts, the
input voltage is limited to 17.5 V. A digital display and keypad are optional. The Model 706 is available with
HART Communication as the Model 706-51 and with Fieldbus Communication as the Model 706-52.

The Model 706 is housed in a dual compartment (die-cast aluminium or investment cast 316SS) enclosure with
separate wiring and electronics compartments. The Model 706 housing is a new design that has been designed
for approval as explosion-proof.

The wiring compartment at the top of the transmitter isolates the power/signal conductors from the electronics
compartment beneath it by way of an environmentally sealed feed-through. A quick disconnect probe coupling
eases installation and allows probes to be installed without concern for their orientation to the transmitter head.
Probe mounting can be provided integrally, directly to the electronics housing, or can be remotely mounted up to
12 feet from the electronics housing.

Model Code structure and relevant parameters:

706-51ab-cde / 7fg-hijk-lmn-op-q. Eclipse Level Transmitter / Eclipse Level Probe.


Entity Parameters:
Ui = 28.4V, Ii = 120mA, Pi = 0.84W, Ci = 4.4nF, Li = 2.7µH
a = Safety option 1 or 2.
b = Accessories/mounting A, B, C, 0, 1 or 2.
c = Classification 3, A, C or D.
d = Housing 1 or 2.
e = Conduit connection 0, 1, 2 or 3.
f = Measurement system A or C.
g = Configuration/style D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7.
h = Process connection size 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, B, C, D, E or F.
i = Process connection type 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, M, N, T or U
(h = 1 or 2 with f = D, J or S; h = 9 with f = K).
j = Construction codes 0, K, L, M, N or P.
k = Flange option 0, 1 or 2.
l = Material of construction A, B, C, F, P, Q, R, S or T (k = F only with f = F).
m = Spacer material 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (l = 3 only with f = D).
n = O-ring/seal material 0, 2, 8, A, B, D or N (m = B only with f = G or T).
o = Probe size/flushing connection 0, 1 or 2.
p = Special option 0, 1 or 2.
THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE
FM Approvals LLC. 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike, Norwood, MA 02062 USA
T: +1 (1) 781 762 4300 F: +1 (1) 781 762 9375 E-mail: information@fmapprovals.com www.fmapprovals.com

F 348 (Mar 16) Page 3 of 5


SCHEDULE
Canadian Certificate Of Conformity No: FM16CA0111X

q = Insertion length (3 digits max) in:


• inches (English units e = A, rigid probes f = D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z).
• feet (English units e = A, flexible probes f = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7).
• centimeters (metric units e = C, rigid probes f = D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z).
• meters (metric units e = C, flexible probes f = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7).

706-52ab-cde / 7fg-hijk-lmn-op-q. Eclipse Level Transmitter / Eclipse Level Probe.


FISCO Parameters:
Ui = 17.5V, Ii = 380mA, Pi = 5.32W, Ci = 0.5nF, Li = 2.7µH
FNICO Parameters:
Ui = 17.5V, Ii = 380mA, Pi = 5.32W, Ci = 0.5nF, Li = 2.7µH
a = Safety option 1 or 2.
b = Accessories/Mounting: A, B, C, 0, 1 or 2.
c = Classification: 3, A, C or D.
d = Housing Material: 1 or 2.
e = Conduit: 0, 1, 2 or 3.
f = Measurement: A or C.
g = Configuration/Style: D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
h = Process connection size: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, B, C, D, E or F.
i = Process connection type: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, M, N, T or U (h = 1 or 2 only
with f = F, J, 1, 2, 5 or 7; h = 1, 2, 3, 4, A or B only with f = D, P, S, T or V; h = 5, 6, 7, 8, K, L, M or N only
with f = D, J or S; h = 9 only with K).
j = Construction codes: 0, K, L, M, N or P.
k = Flange option: 0, 1, or 2.
l = Material of construction: A, B, C, F, P, Q, R or S (k = F only with f = F).
m = Spacer Material: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (l = 3 only with f = D).
n = O-ring / seal material: 0, 2, 8, A, B, D or N (m = B only with f = G or T).
o = Probe size/Flushing Connection: 0, 1 or 2.
p = Special Option: 0, 1, or 2.
q = Probe Length:
inches (English units e = A, rigid probes f = D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z)
feet (English units e = A, flexible probes f = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7)
centimeters (metric units e = C rigid probes f = D, F, G, J, K, L, M, N, P, S, T, V, Y, Z).
meters (metric units e = C flexible probes f = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7)

13. Specific Conditions of Use:

1. The enclosure contains aluminum and is considered to present a potential risk of ignition by
impact or friction. Care must be taken during installation and use to prevent impact or friction.
2. To maintain the T4 temperature code care shall be taken to ensure the enclosure
temperature does not exceed 75ºC.
3. The risk of electrostatic discharge shall be minimized at installation, following the direction
given in the instruction.
4. Contact the original manufacturer for information in the dimensions of flameproof joints.
5. For Installation with ambient temperature of 70ºC, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for
guidance on proper selection of conductors.
6. Provisions shall be made to provide transient overvoltage protection to a level not to exceed
119Vdc.

THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE
FM Approvals LLC. 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike, Norwood, MA 02062 USA
T: +1 (1) 781 762 4300 F: +1 (1) 781 762 9375 E-mail: information@fmapprovals.com www.fmapprovals.com

F 348 (Mar 16) Page 4 of 5


SCHEDULE
Canadian Certificate Of Conformity No: FM16CA0111X

14. Test and Assessment Procedure and Conditions:

This Certificate has been issued in accordance with FM Approvals Canadian Certification Scheme.

15. Schedule Drawings

A copy of the technical documentation has been kept by FM Approvals.

16. Certificate History

Details of the supplements to this certificate are described below:

Date Description

6th April 2015 Original Issue.


Supplement 1:
Report Reference: – RR205631 dated 17th October 2016.
Description of the Change: For Model 706-51 and 706-52: Addition of first digit in
17th October 2016
Model code named Safety option to new safety Sil certified option. Correction to Model
code “Classification” variable options.

THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ONLY BE REPRODUCED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND WITHOUT CHANGE
FM Approvals LLC. 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike, Norwood, MA 02062 USA
T: +1 (1) 781 762 4300 F: +1 (1) 781 762 9375 E-mail: information@fmapprovals.com www.fmapprovals.com

F 348 (Mar 16) Page 5 of 5


Electric Switch
Mechanisms

Installation and Operating Manual

Series
B, C, D, F,
O, Q, S, U, W,
and X
with
Aluminum,
Carbon Steel,
or
Cast Iron
Housings
Read this Manual Before Installing Notice of Copyright and Limitations
This manual provides information on Electric Switch Magnetrol & Magnetrol logotype are registered trade-
Mechanisms. It is important that all instructions are read marks of Magnetrol International. Copyright © 2016
carefully and followed in sequence. Detailed instructions Magnetrol International. All rights reserved.
are included in the Installation section of this manual.
Performance specifications are effective with date of issue
and are subject to change without notice.
Conventions Used in this Manual
Certain conventions are used in this manual to convey Magnetrol reserves the right to make changes to the
specific types of information. General technical material, products described in this manual at any time without
support data, and safety information are presented in notice. Magnetrol makes no warranty with respect to the
narrative form. The following styles are used for notes, accuracy of the information in this manual.
cautions, and warnings.
Warranty
NOTES All Magnetrol mechanical level and flow controls are war-
Notes contain information that augments or clarifies ranted free of defects in materials or workmanship for five
an operating step. Notes do not normally contain full years from the date of original factory shipment.
actions. They follow the procedural steps to which
they refer. If returned within the warranty period; and, upon factory
inspection of the control, the cause of the claim is
determined to be covered under the warranty; then,
Cautions
Magnetrol will repair or replace the control at no cost to
Cautions alert the technician to special conditions that the purchaser (or owner) other than transportation.
could injure personnel, damage equipment, or reduce
a component’s mechanical integrity. Cautions are also Magnetrol shall not be liable for misapplication, labor
used to alert the technician to unsafe practices or the claims, direct or consequential damage or expense arising
need for special protective equipment or specific from the installation or use of equipment. There are no
materials. In this manual, a caution indicates a other warranties expressed or implied, except special
potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, written warranties covering some Magnetrol products.
may result in minor or moderate injury.
Quality Assurance
WARNINGS The quality assurance system in place at Magnetrol
Warnings identify potentially dangerous situations or guarantees the highest level of quality throughout the
serious hazards. In this manual, a warning indicates an company. Magnetrol is committed to providing full
imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, customer satisfaction both in quality products and
could result in serious injury or death. quality service.

The Magnetrol quality assurance


WARNING! Explosion hazard. Do not connect or
system is registered to ISO 9001
disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off
affirming its commitment to known
or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
international quality standards
Low Voltage Directive providing the strongest assurance of
product/service quality available.
For use in Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by manu-
facturer, protection provided by equipment may be
impaired.
Electric Switch Mechanisms
Table of Contents
1.0 Reference Information.....................................................4 4.0 Preventative Maintenance..............................................13
1.1 Principle of Operation ..............................................4 4.1 Inspect Switch Mechanisms ....................................13
1.2 Operating Cycle ........................................................4
5.0 Switch Specifications .....................................................14
1.3 Description ...............................................................5
1.3.1 Dry contact switches B, C, D, O, Q, S and U ...5 6.0 Replacement Switch Mechanisms.................................15
1.3.2 Hermetically sealed switches F, W and X........5 6.0.1 Magnet strength ...........................................15
6.1 Yellow Dot Magnet Replacement Mechanisms........15
2.0 Installation.......................................................................6
6.1.1 Series B, C, D, F, O, Q, S, U, W and X.......15
2.1 Replacing Switch Mechanism....................................6
6.2 Red Dot Magnet Replacement Mechanisms............16
2.2 Replacing Dry Contact Switches ...............................7
6.2.1 Series B, C, F, U, W and X ..........................16
2.2.1 Series B, C, D, F, O, Q, S, U, W and X.........7
2.3 Vibration Service Adjustment ...................................8 7.0 Switch Housing Replacement Assemblies .....................17
7.0.1 Aluminum housings .....................................17
3.0 Wiring .............................................................................9
7.0.2 Cast iron housings........................................18
3.1 SPDT Terminal Connections ....................................9
7.0.3 Carbon steel housings...................................18
3.1.1 Single float with one switch or
7.1 Replacement Housing Kits......................................19
single stage displacer.......................................9
7.1.1 Referred by eighth, ninth and tenth digit .....19
3.1.2 Single float with two switches or
7.1.2 Referred by description ................................19
dual stage displacer.........................................9
7.1.3 ATEX ...........................................................19
3.1.3 Single float with three switches or
7.2 Replacement Gaskets and Hardware .......................20
three stage displacer......................................10
3.2 DPDT Terminal Connections.................................11 8.0 Manual Reset Option ....................................................20
3.2.1 Single float with one switch or 8.1 Parts Breakdown and Identification.........................20
single stage displacer.....................................11 8.2 Field Installation Instructions..................................21
3.2.2 Single float with two switches or
9.0 Switch and Housing Model Codes................................22
dual stage displacer.......................................11
9.1 Type 4, 4X, 7, 9 and Group B Enclosure Codes .....22
3.2.3 Three stage displacer ....................................12
9.2 ATEX Enclosure Codes...........................................31
1.0 Reference Information

1.1 Principle of Operation

Figures 1 & 2 illustrate the simple, reliable operating prin-


ciple of a float level switch. Switching action is obtained
through the use of a magnetic sleeve (4) and a float (3),
displacer or flow sensing element and a switching mecha-
nism (2). These two basic component assemblies are sepa-
rated by a non-magnetic, pressure tight enclosing tube (5).
The switch (2) and magnet (1) are assembled to a mecha-
nism with a swinging arm which operates on precision
stainless steel pivots.

1.2 Operating Cycle

2 As level of a liquid in a vessel rises (Figure 1), the float


Pivot rides on the liquid surface moving the magnetic sleeve
5
upward in the enclosing tube and into the field of the
Return
Spring
switch mechanism magnet. As a result, the magnet is
4 1 drawn in tightly to the enclosing tube moving the switch
3 adjusting screw and allowing the activating arm of the
Process
snap switch to move, making or breaking the electrical
Process
Liquid Liquid circuit. As the liquid level recedes (Figure 2), the float and
magnetic sleeve moves downward until the switch magnet
Rising Level Falling Level
releases and is drawn outward, away from the enclosing
Figure 1 Figure 2 tube by a tension spring. This in turn allows the activat-
Rising Level Falling Level ing arm of the snap switch to move, thus reversing
switch action.
Switch mechanisms may include a single switch or multi-
ple switches, depending on operational requirements and
switching action desired.

4 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


1.3 Description
Magnetrol level controls are available with a range of dif-
ferent switch mechanisms—each designed for specific serv-
ice conditions. A brief description of the individual switch
mechanisms and their applications are given below.

1.3.1 Dry Contact Switches B, C, D, O, Q, S and U


Figure 3
• Series B switches are general purpose with a maximum
Series B, C, D, O and Q Dry
Contact Switches liquid temperature rating of +250° F (+121° C), see
Figure 3.
• Series C switches are general purpose with a maximum
liquid temperature rating of +450° F (+232° C), see
Figure 3.
• Series D switches are designed for DC current applica-
tions with a maximum liquid temperature rating of
+250° F (+121° C), see Figure 3.
• Series O switches are general purpose with a maximum
liquid temperature rating of +300° F (+149° C), used only
in model C10 and C15 units, see Figure 3.
Figure 4
Series S
• Series Q switches are general purpose with a maximum
Snap Switch liquid temperature rating of +250° F (+121° C), used only
in model C10 and C15 units, see Figure 3.
• Series S switches are general purpose with a maximum liq-
uid temperature rating of +550° F (+288° C), or designed
for DC current applications with a maximum liquid tem-
perature of +250° F (+121° C), used only in model B40
units, see Figure 4.
• Series U switches have gold alloy contacts and are suitable
for applications with a maximum liquid temperature of
+250° F (+121° C).
Figure 5
Series F 1.3.2 Hermetically Sealed Switches F, W and X
Hermetically Sealed Switch
Hermetically sealed switches are for use in special applica-
tions where hermetically sealed contacts are required.
• Series F switches are well suited for use in process temper-
atures up to +750° F (+399° C), see Figure 5.
• Series W switches are suitable for applications with a
maximum liquid temperature of +450° F (+232° C).
• Series X switches have gold-plated contacts and are suitable
for applications with a maximum liquid temperature of
+450° F (+232° C).
NOTE: See bulletin 42-694 for series HS & H1 hermetically
sealed switches.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 5


2.0 Installation

2.1 Replacing Switch Mechanism


Caution: Before attempting to remove a switch mechanism, be cer-
tain to pull disconnect switch or otherwise assure that
electrical circuit through control is de-energized.
1. Disconnect wiring from supply side of terminal block
on switch mechanism. Note and record lead wire
terminal locations.
2. Loosen screw in split mounting clamp until mechanism
slides freely on enclosing tube, refer to Figure 6.
3. Remove small round head screw securing lower switch
mechanism to baffle plate, refer to Figure 7.
Figure 6
Mounting Screw 4. Slide switch mechanism off of enclosing tube. If mechanism
is to be reused, ensure that it is placed on a clean surface,
free of metallic particles that may be attracted to the
switch magnet.
Caution: Always handle the switch mechanisms about or around
the terminal block. Replacement switch mechanisms are
precision instruments which have been factory-calibrated
to operate with the level control specified. Extreme care
should be taken: 1) when handling the switch mechanism;
2) to assure that the magnet does not come in contact
with any magnetic materials; and, 3) that the switch mech-
anism is always placed on a clean, non-magnetic surface
free of metal particles which may be attracted to the
switch mechanism magnet. DO NOT attempt to make any
adjustments to switch mechanisms.

Baffle Plate Screw 5. Loosen mounting screw so that switch frame will fit over
e-tube. Install switch mechanism by sliding it over the
Figure 7 enclosing tube. Slide mechanism down until the bottom of
Baffle Plate Screw the frame and terminal block are resting on the baffle
plate. The baffle plate should be resting on the hub of the
housing base.
6. Install and tighten baffle plate screw so that the switch
mechanism may not be separated from the baffle plate.
Tighten the mechanism mounting screw so that the mech-
anism is firmly clamped to the enclosing tube.
7. Swing magnet assembly in and out by hand, checking
carefully for any signs of binding.
8. Reattached supply-side wiring to the terminal block and
check switch function by varying liquid level in the vessel.

6 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


2.2 Replacing Dry Contact Switches

2.2.1 Series B, C, D, F, O, Q, S, U, W and X


1. Disconnect control from power supply.
2. Disconnect switch leads from terminal block. Note and
record terminal connections of switch to be replaced.
3. Remove two mounting screws holding existing switch,
refer to Figure 8.
4. Remove existing switch and install replacement switch in
the same position, tightening mounting screws securely.
NOTE: For proper operation of the replacement switch, it must actu-
Adjusting ate in the middle portion of the pivoted magnet’s swing.
Screw
5. Check switch action and adjust as follows:
a. Slowly rotate the pivoted magnet by hand, back and
Mounting
forth through its angle of swing, listening closely for the
Screws actuating click of the switch in each direction.
Figure 8 b. Check to see if there is equal overtravel of magnet in its
Dry Contact Switch Mechanism swing after the switch click in either direction.
c. If switch actuation is not correct, change adjustment of
actuating screw using a 1⁄16" hexagon key wrench, refer to
Figure 8.
NOTE: If a single switch is being replaced on a DPDT mechanism,
lever of second switch must be depressed and held to allow
for the audible adjustment of new switch, as described above.
d. With new switch in adjustment, release lever of second
switch and perform fine-tuning of both switches to
provide simultaneous actuation (clicks).
6. Reconnect power supply and test switch action by vary-
ing liquid level in the vessel or by “gently blowing down”
float chamber.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 7


2.3 Vibration Service Adjustment

Level controls are frequently used in applications where


vibration is encountered, such as on scrubbers or com-
pressors. Switch mechanisms may require repositioning to
prevent unwanted magnet movement. This position is
Vessel
usually best at right angles to the direction of vibration.
The direction of vibration may be determined by the
Baffle plate
Frame mounting screw arrangement of connections to the vessel or the vessels
mounting method. Accordingly, the vibration will tend to
be in one direction only.
Upon determining the vibration direction, switch mecha-
Incorrect nism(s) may be rotated from an incorrect position (as
shown in Figure 9, illustration is shown as looking at a
control from above), to a correct position as follows:
Caution: Before attempting to remove a switch mechanism, be cer-
tain to pull disconnect switch or otherwise assure that
Direction of
vibration
electrical circuit through control is de-energized.
1. Disconnect control from power supply.
2. Loosen screw in split mounting clamp until mechanism
turns freely on enclosing tube, refer to Figure 6 on page 6.
Baffle plate 3. Rotate entire mechanism and bottom baffle plate together
to the correct position.
Caution: Be certain power supply wires retain some slack at new
position. Do not pull wires taut.

Correct NOTE: Amount of rotation required will vary with each installation and
may not be as much as shown in illustration.
4. Check action of switch magnet at new position. When
Swing of magnet
magnet vibrates from side to side, instead of front to back,
correct position has been attained.
Direction of vibration
5. Tighten clamp screw on switch mechanism.
Figure 9 6. Reconnect power supply, and test switch action under
Rotation of Switch operating conditions.
Mechanism in Vibration

8 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


3.0 Wiring
Circuits shown are for direct-acting level switches and are
reversed in side mounting float-in-tank models, which
utilize a reversing float pivot.
NOTE: See bulletin 42-694 for wiring diagrams for “HS” Series
hermetically sealed switches.

3.1 SPDT Terminal Connections

3.1.1 Single float with one switch or single stage displacer


1. Rising level closes contacts 5 & 6, see Figure 10.
2. Falling level closes contacts 4 & 5.
3. Wiring Diagram is reversed (high level actuation becomes
low level actuation, etc.) when this switch mechanism is
used on side mounted float switches employing a reversing
pivot (Models B40, T52, T62, T63, etc.).

3.1.2 Single float with two switches or dual stage displacer


1. Rising level closes contacts 5 & 6 and 2 & 3, see Figure 11.
2. Falling level closes contacts 4 & 5 and 1 & 2.
3. Wiring diagram is reversed (high level actuation becomes
low level actuation, etc.) when this switch mechanism is
used on side mounted float switches employing a reversing
pivot (Models B40, T52, T62, T63, etc.).
4. On units with tandem floats, the top float operates the
bottom mechanism while the bottom float actuates the
top mechanism.
Upper stage operates Assem.
upper switch mechanism A
Internal
Load Circuit
Close on Low Level (NC)
1
Common (C)
2
Internal
Load Circuit Close on High Level (NO)
Close on Low Level (NC) 3
4
Load
Common (C)
5
Close on High Level (NO)
6
Load
Lower stage operates Assem.
lower switch mechanism B
Figure 10 Internal
Load Circuit
Close on Low Level (NC)
Single Float with One Switch 4
or Single Stage Displacer Common (C)
5
Close on High Level (NO)
6
Load

Figure 11
Single Float with Two Switches
or Dual Stage Displacer

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 9


3.1.3 Single float with three switches or
three stage displacer:
1. Rising level closes contacts 5 & 6 and 2 & 3, see Figure 12.
2. Falling level closes contacts 4 & 5 and 1 & 2.
3. Unit is shipped with switches positioned for proper
function. Do not change switch spacing.

Upper stage operates Assem.


upper switch mechanism B
Internal
Load Circuit
Close on Low Level (NC)
4
Common (C)
5
Close on High Level (NO)
6
Load

Middle stage operates Assem.


middle switch mechanism A
Internal
Load Circuit
Close on Low Level (NC)
1
Common (C)
2
Close on High Level (NO)
3
Load

Lower stage operates Assem.


lower switch mechanism B
Internal
Load Circuit
Close on Low Level (NC)
4
Common (C)
5
Close on High Level (NO)
6
Load

Figure 12
Single Float with Three Switches
or Three Stage Displacer

10 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


3.2 DPDT Terminal Connections

3.2.1 Single float with one switch or single stage displacer


1. Rising level closes contacts 5 & 6 and 2 & 3, see Figure13.
2. Falling level closes contacts 4 & 5 and 1 & 2.
3. Double pole action is obtained by simultaneous operation
of the right and left side single pole double throw switches.
4. Wiring diagram is reversed (close on high becomes close
on low, etc.) when this switch mechanism is used on side
mounted float switches employing a reversing pivot.
(Models B40, T52, T62, T63, etc.)

3.2.2 Single float with two switches or dual stage displacer


1. Rising level closes contacts 5 & 6 and 2 & 3, see Figure 14.
2. Falling level closes contacts 4 & 5 and 1 & 2.
3. Double pole action is obtained by simultaneous operation
of the right and left side single pole switches.
4. Wiring diagram is reversed (close on high becomes close
on low, etc.) when this switch mechanism is used on side
mounted float switches employing a reversing pivot.
(Models B40, T52, T62, T63, etc.)
5. On units with tandem floats, the top float operates the
bottom mechanism while the bottom float actuates the
top mechanism.
Lower stage operates lower switch mechanism

Internal Circuit Internal Circuit


(Left Switch) 4 1 (Right Switch)

5 2

6 3

Load Load
Close on high level (NO) Close on high level (NO)
Common (C) Common (C)

Internal Circuit Internal Circuit Close on low level (NC) Close on low level (NC)
(Left Switch) 4 1 (Right Switch)
Load Load
5 2

6 3
Upper stage operates upper switch mechanism

Load Load Internal Circuit Internal Circuit


Close on high level (NO) Close on high level (NO) (Left Switch) 4 1 (Right Switch)
Common (C) Common (C)
5 2
Close on low level (NC) Close on low level (NC)
6 3
Load Load

Figure 13
Load Load
Close on high level (NO) Close on high level (NO)
Single Float with One Switch
Common (C) Common (C)
or Single Stage Displacer
Close on low level (NC) Close on low level (NC)

Load Load
Figure 14
Single Float with Two Switches or Dual Stage Displacer

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 11


3.2.3 Three Stage Displacer
1. Rising level closes contacts 5 & 6 and 2 & 3, see Figure 15.
2. Falling level closes contacts 4 & 5 and 1 & 2.
3. Double pole action is obtained by simultaneous operation
of the right and left side single pole switches.

Upper stage operates


upper switch mechanism

Internal Circuit Internal Circuit


(Left Switch) 4 1 (Right Switch)

5 2

6 3

Load Load
Close on high level (NO) Close on high level (NO)
Common (C) Common (C)

Close on low level (NC) Close on low level (NC)

Load Load

Middle stage operates


middle switch mechanism

Internal Circuit Internal Circuit


(Left Switch) 4 1 (Right Switch)

5 2

6 3

Load Load
Close on high level (NO) Close on high level (NO)
Common (C) Common (C)

Close on low level (NC) Close on low level (NC)

Load Load

Lower stage operates


lower switch mechanism

Internal Circuit Internal Circuit


(Left Switch) 4 1 (Right Switch)

5 2

6 3

Load Load
Close on high level (NO) Close on high level (NO)
Common (C) Common (C)

Close on low level (NC) Close on low level (NC)

Load Load

Figure 15
Three Stage Displacer

12 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


4.0 Preventative Maintenance
Inspect switch mechanisms, terminals and connections
regularly. Proof test interval to be determined by application
requirements (required reliablity, operating conditions,
site requirements, etc.).

4.1 Inspect Switch Mechanisms, Terminals


and Connections

1. Dry contact switches should be inspected for excessive


wear on actuating lever or misalignment of adjustment
screw at point of contact between screw and lever. Such
wear can cause false switch actuating levels.
2. DO NOT operate your control with defective or mal-
adjusted switch mechanisms.
3. Level controls may sometimes be exposed to excessive
heat or moisture. Under such conditions, insulation on
electrical wiring may become brittle, eventually breaking
or peeling away. The resulting “bare” wires can cause
short circuits.
NOTE: Check wiring carefully and replace at the first sign of brittle
insulation.
4. Vibration may sometimes cause terminal screws to loosen.
Check all terminal connections to be certain that screws
are tight.
NOTE: Spare switches should be kept on hand at all times.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 13


5.0 Switch Specifications
RATING
SWITCH SWITCH PROCESS
SERIES ➀ TYPE TEMP. RANGE ➁ LOAD Volts AC Volts DC
° F (° C) 120 240 480 24 120 240

-40 to +250 Non-Inductive Amp 15.00 15.00 15.00 6.00 0.50 0.25
B Snap (-40 to +121) Inductive Amp 15.00 15.00 15.00 5.00 0.05 0.03
Horsepower 1
⁄8 1
⁄4 — — — —

-40 to +450 Non-Inductive Amp 15.00 15.00 15.00 6.00 1.00 0.50
C Snap (-40 to +232) Inductive Amp 15.00 15.00 15.00 5.00 — —
Horsepower 1
⁄10 1
⁄6 — — — —

1.50 min.
-40 to +250 Non-Inductive Amp 10.00 — — 10.00 10.00
3.00 max.
D Snap (-40 to +121) Inductive Amp 3.80 — — — 2.20 —
Horsepower 1
⁄8 — — — 1
⁄8 —

F -50 to +750 Resistive Amp 2.50 — — 4.00 ➂ 0.30 —


(followed Hermetic (-46 to +399) Inductive Amp 2.50 — — 2.00 ➂ 0.10 —
by letter)

F -50 to +250 Resistive Amp 1.00 — — 15.00 ➂ — —


(followed Hermetic (-46 to +121) Inductive Amp 1.00 — — 10.00 ➂ — —
by number)

-40 to +450 Non-Inductive Amp 15.00 15.00 15.00 — 1.00 0.50


O Snap (-40 to +232) Inductive Amp 15.00 15.00 15.00 — — —
Horsepower 1
⁄10 1
⁄6 — — — —

-40 to +250 Non-Inductive Amp 15.00 15.00 15.00 6.00 0.50 0.25
Q Snap (-40 to +121) Inductive Amp 15.00 15.00 15.00 5.00 0.05 0.30
Horsepower 1
⁄8 1
⁄4 — — — —

SA
-40 to +550 Non-Inductive Amp 15.00 15.00 15.00 — 1.00 0.50
SD
Snap (-40 to +288) Inductive Amp 15.00 15.00 15.00 — 0.50 —
SK
Horsepower 1
⁄10 1
⁄6 — — — —
SN

SB 1.50 min.
-40 to +250 Non-Inductive Amp 10.00 — — 10.00 10.00
SE 3.00 max.
SL Snap (-40 to +121) Inductive Amp 3.80 — — — 2.20 —
SO Horsepower 1
⁄8 — — — 1
⁄8 —

(X) B Snap
-40 to +250 Non-inductive 1.00 — — — — —
(x=gold Gold
(-40 to +121) Inductive 1.00 — — — — —
contacts) Contacts

(X) F Hermetic
-50 to +750 Non-inductive — — — 1.00 — —
(x=gold Snap Gold
(-46 to +399) Inductive — — — 0.25 — —
contacts) Contacts

(X) HS Hermetic
-50 to +550 Non-inductive 2.00
(-46 to +288) ➃ Inductive
(x=gold Snap Gold 1.00 — — — —
— — — 1.00 — —
contacts) Contacts

Non-inductive Amp 1.00 — — — 1.00 —


Snap Gold -40 to +250
U Inductive Amp — — — — 1.00 —
Contacts (-40 to +121)
Horsepower — — — — — —

Non-inductive Amp 1.00 1.00 — 3.00 ➂ 0.50 —


Hermetic -50 to +450
W Inductive Amp — 0.80 — — — —
Snap (-46 to +232)
Horsepower — — — — — —

Hermetic Non-inductive Amp 0.50 0.50 — 0.50 0.50 0.50


-50 to +450
X Snap Gold Inductive Amp 0.15 — — — — —
(-46 to +232)
Contacts Horsepower — — — — — —

➀ For currents under 100 mA, gold contact switches should be used.
➁ Process temperatures based on +100 °F (+38 °C) ambient temperature.
➂ 28 VDC
➃ On steam applications, temperature down-rated to +400 °F (+204 °C) at +100 °F (+38 °C) ambient.

14 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


6.0 Replacement Switch Mechanisms

6.0.1 Magnet strength


Switch mechanisms are provided with different strength mag-
nets as determined by the characteristics of the level switch. A
red, red/yellow or yellow dot is visible on each magnet. When
ordering replacement switch mechanisms, be certain to deter-
mine the color dot on the magnet. For these types of switch-
es, the tenth digit of the model number identifies the magnet
used on the control. The correct magnet dot color may be
chosen by finding the tenth digit of your model number at
the top of the chart. Any model numbers preceded with an
“X” are specially modified controls. Contact the factory for
replacement part numbers.

6.1 Yellow Dot Magnet Replacement Mechanisms

6.1.1 Series B, C, D, F, O, Q, S, U, W & X – Yellow


10th Digit
E, F, Y, M, W, Q, B, S, K Switch
Switch 8th & 9th
Series Contacts Quantity Digit Bottom Mech Middle Mech Top Mech Only
1 BA, BK N/A
N/A
SPDT 2 BB, BL 089-7401-104
089-7401-103
B 3 BC, BM 089-7401-104 089-7101-020
1 BD, BN N/A
DPDT 089-7401-122 N/A
2 BE, BO 089-7401-122
1 CA, CK N/A
N/A
SPDT 2 CB, CL 089-7401-110
089-7401-109
C 3 CC, CM 089-7401-110 089-7101-022
1 CD, CN
DPDT 089-7401-125 N/A
2 CE, CO 089-7401-125
1 DA, DK N/A
N/A
SPDT 2 DB, DL 089-7401-106
089-7401-105
D 3 DC, DM 089-7401-106 089-7101-024
1 DD, DN N/A
DPDT 089-7401-123 N/A
2 DE, DO 089-7401-123
1 FA, FK N/A
SPDT 089-7401-095 N/A
2 FB, FL 089-7401-096
F 089-7101-041
1 FD, FN N/A
DPDT 089-7401-098 N/A
2 FE, FO 089-7401-098
SPDT 3 OC, OM 089-7401-110 089-7401-109 089-7401-110
O 089-7101-022
DPDT 3 OE, OK 089-7401-125 089-7401-125 089-7401-125
SPDT 3 QC, QM 089-7401-104 089-7401-103 089-7401-104
Q 089-7101-020
DPDT 3 QE, QK 089-7401-122 089-7401-122 089-7401-122
SPDT 1 SA, SK 089-7401-126
S N/A 089-7101-022
DPDT 1 SD, SN 089-7401-128
SPDT 1 SB, SL 089-7401-129
S (DC volt) N/A 089-7101-024
DPDT 1 SE, SO 089-7401-127

Continued on next page.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 15


6.1.1 Series B, C, D, F, O, Q, S, U, W & X – Yellow (cont.)
10th Digit
E, F, Y, M, W, Q, B, S, K
Switch 8th & 9th Switch Only
Series Contacts Quantity Digits Bottom Mech Middle Mech Top Mech
1 UA, UK, UU 047-5534-001 N/A N/A
SPDT 2 UB, UL, UV 047-5534-001 047-5535-001 N/A
U 3 UC, UM, UW 047-5534-001 047-5535-001 047-5534-001 037-4630-001
1 UD, UN, UX 047-6520-001 N/A N/A
DPDT
2 UE, UO, UY 047-6520-001 047-6520-001 N/A
1 WA, WK, WU 089-7410-004 N/A N/A
SPDT 2 WB, WL, WV 089-7410-004 089-7410-003 N/A
W 3 WC, WM, WW 089-7410-004 089-7410-003 089-7410-004 037-9101-001
1 WD, WN, WX 089-7410-005 N/A N/A
DPDT
2 WE, WO, WY 089-7410-005 089-7410-005 N/A
1 XA, XK, XU 089-7412-004 N/A N/A
SPDT 2 XB, XL, XV 089-7412-004 089-7412-003 N/A
X 3 XC, XM, XW 089-7412-004 089-7412-003 089-7412-004 037-9102-001
1 XD, XN, XX 089-7412-005 N/A N/A
DPDT
2 XE, XO, XY, X4 089-7412-005 089-7412-005 N/A

6.2 Red Dot Magnet Replacement Mechanisms

6.2.1 Series B, C, F, U, W & X – Red, Red/Yellow


10th Digit
G, H, R, D, V, P, A, T, J
Switch 8th & 9th Switch Only
Series Contacts Quantity Digits Bottom Mech Middle Mech Top Mech
1 BA, BK N/A
N/A
SPDT 2 BB, BL 089-7401-102
089-7401-101
B 3 BC, BM 089-7401-102 089-7101-020
1 BD, BN N/A
DPDT 089-7401-121 N/A
2 BE, BO 089-7401-121
1 CA, CK N/A
N/A
SPDT 2 CB, CL 089-7401-108
089-7401-107
C 3 CC, CM 089-7401-108 089-7101-022
1 CD, CN N/A
DPDT 089-7401-124 N/A
2 CE, CO 089-7401-124
1 FA, FK N/A
SPDT 089-7401-093
2 FB, FL 089-7401-094
F N/A 089-7101-041
1 FD, FN N/A
DPDT 089-7401-097
2 FE, FO 089-7401-097
1 UA, UK, UU 047-5533-001 N/A N/A
SPDT 2 UB, UL, UV 047-5533-001 047-5536-001 N/A
U 3 UC, UM, UW 047-5533-001 047-5536-001 047-5533-001 037-4630-001
1 UD, UN, UX 047-6519-001 N/A N/A
DPDT
2 UE, UO, UY 047-6519-001 047-6519-001 N/A

Continued on next page.

16 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


6.2.1 Series B, C, F, U, W & X – Red, Red/Yellow (cont.)
10th Digit
G, H, R, D, V, P, A, T, J
Switch 8th & 9th Switch Only
Series Contacts Quantity Digits Bottom Mech Middle Mech Top Mech
1 WA, WK, WU 089-7410-002 N/A N/A
SPDT 2 WB, WL, WV 089-7410-002 089-7410-001 N/A
W 3 WC, WM, WW 089-7410-002 089-7410-001 089-7410-002 089-7411-001
1 N/A
DPDT N/A
2 N/A
1 XA, XK, XU 089-7412-002 N/A N/A
SPDT 2 XB, XL, XV 089-7412-002 089-7412-001 N/A
X 3 XC, XM, XW 089-7412-002 089-7412-001 089-7412-002 089-7413-001
1 N/A
DPDT N/A
2 N/A

7.0 Switch Housing Replacement


Assemblies
When ordering replacement parts for an existing
Magnetrol instrument, please specify:
1. Model and serial numbers of control.
Enclosing Tube Assembly
2. Description and part number of replacement kit.
Switch Assembly
Housing Cover
The proper replacement switch housing kit and parts can
be determined by the last three characters of the model
Patent Label number. In section 6.1.1 on page 18, locate the eighth and
Lockwasher Baffle Plate
ninth digits of your model number at the left side of the
Ground Screw
chart. Follow the appropriate row across the page while
Gasket
locating the tenth digit of your model number at the top
Pipe Plug
of the chart. In section 6.1.2 on page 18, the chart lists the
replacement housing kits according to description.

7.0.1 Aluminum Housings


Housing Base Set Screw
O-ring
Set Screw Die cast aluminum TYPE 4X housing replacements are
Breather Drain Enclosing Tube Assembly
(optional) available for general purpose or weatherproof installations.
Explosion proof TYPE 4X/7/9 and Class I, Div 1,
Figure 16 Group B housing replacements are available for hazardous
Aluminum Housing Assembly atmosphere locations. Die cast aluminum housings are fin-
ished with a baked-on polyester powder coat paint.
NOTE: Consult your local representative on applications to meet
other codes or approvals not covered in this bulletin.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 17


7.0.2 Cast Iron Housings
Cast Iron TYPE 7/9 housing replacements are available for
hazardous atmosphere locations. Both Class I, Div. 1,
Groups C & D and Group B versions are available. The
grey iron cover and base are finished with a baked-on poly-
ester powder coat paint.
NOTE: Consult your local representative on applications to meet
NEMA and other codes not covered in this bulletin.

Figure 17
Cast Iron Housing Assembly

7.0.3 Carbon Steel Housings


Carbon steel TYPE 4X switch housings are available for
general purpose and weatherproof installations. The hous-
ing base is cast from aluminum while the cover is made
from cold rolled steel. The housings are finished with a
baked-on polyester powder coat paint.
NOTE: Consult your local representative on applications to meet
other codes or approvals not covered in this bulletin.

Figure 18
Carbon Steel Housing Assembly

18 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


7.1 Replacement Housing Kits ➀

7.1.1 Referenced by eighth, ninth and tenth digit


Tenth Digit
Eighth Digit Ninth Digit
E, G, Y, R P, Q S, T F, H, D, M A, B J, K, G V, W

A, B, C, D, E 089-6509-003➁ 089-6582-023 N/A 089-6510-003➁ 089-6582-024 N/A N/A


B, C, D,
K, L, M, N, O 089-6582-002 089-6582-023 089-6582-032 089-6582-005 089-6582-024 089-6582-033 089-6582-008
F, G, H, I, S
U, V, W, X, Y 089-6582-003 089-6582-028 089-6582-006 089-6582-029

A, B, C, D, E N/A 089-6528-003 089-6582-025 N/A N/A


O, Q N/A N/A
K, L, M, N, O 089-6578-001 089-6582-025
➀ Housing kits include o-rings and hardware. Baffle plate not included.
➁ Cover kit only. Housing base must be ordered separately by P/N 089-6505-003.

7.1.2 Referenced by description


Cover TYPE 4X/7/9 TYPE 7/9
Housing Material TYPE 1 TYPE 4X TYPE 4X/7/9 TYPE 7/9 Group B
Height with drain with drain

CS cover, aluminum base 089-6511-003➁ 089-6509-003➁ N/A N/A


N/A N/A
Short Cast aluminum 089-6582-023 089-6582-023 089-6582-032 089-6582-028
N/A
Cast Iron N/A 089-6582-002 N/A 089-6582-003

CS cover, aluminum base 089-6512-003➁ 089-6510-003➁ N/A N/A


N/A N/A
Tall Cast aluminum 089-6582-024 089-6582-024 089-6582-033 089-6582-029
N/A
Cast Iron N/A 089-6582-005 089-6582-008 N/A 089-6582-006

CS cover, aluminum base 089-6528-003 N/A


N/A
X-Tall Cast aluminum N/A 089-6582-025 089-6582-025 N/A N/A N/A

Cast Iron N/A 089-6578-001

Lexan Cover Kit 089-6522-001➁

7.1.3 ATEX Housing Replacements


Housing Short Tall
Part Description
Material XP IS XP IS
Cover 089-6582-035 089-6582-036 089-6582-037 089-6582-038
Cast Alum Base w/ 1" NPT conduit entry 089-6582-041 089-6582-043 089-6582-041 089-6582-043
Base w/ M20 ¥ 1.5 conduit entry 089-6582-040 089-6582-042 089-6582-040 089-6582-042
Cover
Cast Iron Base w/ 3⁄4" NPT conduit entry C/F
Base w/ M20 ¥ 1.5 conduit entry

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 19


7.2 Replacement Gaskets and Hardware

Enclosure 3/4" Cover Baffle Cover


Housing Material 9th Digit 10th Digit
Type O-ring Gasket Plate ➂ Hardware

CS cover, aluminum base Type 4, 4X A, B, C, D, E D, E, F, H, R, Y, M, G 012-1318-001 036-5303-001 089-6508-001

Cast Iron Type 7/9, 4X/7/9 K, L, M, N, O D, R, Y, M 012-2201-249 036-5303-001

Cast Iron Group B K, L, M, N, O V, W 012-2201-222 005-6603-135

Type 4X A, B, C, D, E A, B, P, Q
012-2201-116
Type 4X/7/9, 7/9 K, L, M, N, O A, B, P, Q
N/A
Cast Aluminum Group B K, L, M, N, O J, K, S, T 012-2201-253 005-6657-001

ATEX XP A, B, C, D, E, F, G C, 9
ATEX IS A, B, C, D, E S, T
Cast Iron ATEX XP U, V, W, Y, 7 5, 7 N/A 012-1301-005 036-5303-001

➂ For models with manual reset options, see page 23 for parts.

8.0 Manual Reset Option

8.1 Parts Breakdown and Identification

Part No. 089-6507-001, on Boiler Controls Equipped


with Manual Reset (*denotes included in kit)

Fastening screw (or nut)

Switch cover

Clamp screw 1
⁄4" Drilled hole

7
⁄8"

Switch assembly
Baffle plate assembly*
Round head screw*
(Baffle Plate to Switch
Mechanism)
Reset plunger*

Reset actuating assembly* Nameplate and


serial number

Figure 19

20 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


8.2 Field Installation Instructions
Caution: Before attempting work on any level control, be certain to
pull disconnect switch or otherwise assure that electrical
circuit through control is de-energized.
1. Remove switch cover by loosening fastening screw (or nut).
2. Drill a 1⁄4" diameter hole in cover at 7⁄8" up from bottom
edge, as shown.
3. Disconnect wiring from supply side of terminal strip on
switch mechanisms.
NOTE: Measure location of switch mechanism(s) on enclosing tube
and record for reference use during reassembly. (Measure
from top of enclosing tube to top of mounting clamp on switch
mechanism[s]).
4. Loosen screw in split mounting clamp of switch mecha-
nism(s) until assembly moves freely on enclosing tube.
5. Remove small round head screw securing baffle plate to
switch mechanism.
6. Carefully lift off switch mechanism(s) and baffle plate.
Place on a clean surface, free of any metal particles that
may be attracted onto the magnet(s).
7. Install a new baffle plate assembly, with manual reset
mechanism, and carefully replace switch mechanism(s) in
reverse of steps 3 through 6 above.
8. Replace switch cover, lining up drilled hole with hole in
reset actuating mechanism. Do not tighten cover fastening
screw (or nut) at this point.
9. Thread reset plunger into actuating mechanism through
drilled hole in switch cover and thumb tighten securely.
Reposition switch cover as necessary to be certain it does
not bind reset plunger.
10. Tighten fastening screw (or nut) on switch cover and
check action of plunger to see that it moves freely.
11. Vary level in float chamber to test operation of manual
reset mechanism.
NOTE: Boiler level controls should not start firing equipment when
boiler water level has returned to normal (safe point) until reset
plunger has been manually depressed. If control starts firing
equipment, magnet stop arm on switch mechanism must be
bent out on switch frame 1⁄32" allowing magnet to swing further
from enclosing tube arm and into the field of the reset magnet.

Caution: If it is necessary to reposition manual reset plunger, entire


switch mechanism(s) must be loosened and rotated on
enclosing tube to desired position (refer to step 4). Do not
attempt to position plunger by twisting switch cover or
damage to switch mechanism(s) will result.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 21


9.0 Switch and Housing Model Codes
The following charts identify the switch and housing model codes used with the buoyancy products. The
eighth, ninth and tenth digit combinations may be used to identify the type and number of switches,
number of contacts, switch magnet strength as well as housing type, size and options. The switch and
housing codes in bold are currently valid and available in combination with various buoyancy products.
The unbolded codes are no longer valid and should be replaced by the appropriate valid code. Mercury
switches are no longer available. All mercury switch mechanisms should be replaced by dry contact
mechanisms with the appropriate process temperature rating. See switch specifications, page 13.

example model number:


B K A

9.1 Type 4, 4X, 7, 9 and Group B Enclosure Codes

Housing Type 4 Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X/7/9


Switch Switch Set Magnet Type 7/9 Type 4X/7/9 Group B
Height Carbon Carbon Cast Alum Cast Alum Group B
Type Contacts Points Dot Color Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Iron
& Options Steel Steel 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 Cast Alum
Yellow AAE AAY AKY AAQ A2Q AKQ — AKS
Short
Red AAG AAR AKR AAP A2P AKP — AKT
1
Yellow AAF AAM AKM AAB A2B AKB AKW AKK
Red AAH AAD AKD AAA A2A AKA AKV AKJ
SPDT
Yellow ABF ABM ALM ABB A4B ALB ALW ALK
Tall 2
Red ABH ABD ALD ABA A4A ALA ALV ALJ
Yellow ACF ACM AMM ACB A6B AMB AMW AMK
3
Red ACH ACD AMD ACA A6A AMA AMV AMJ
Yellow ADE ADY ANY ADQ A8Q ANQ — ANS
Short
Red ADG ADR ANR ADP A8P ANP — ANT
1
Yellow ADF ADM ANM ADB A8B ANB ANW ANK
DPDT
Red ADH ADD AND ADA A8A ANA ANV ANJ
Tall
Yellow AEF AEM AOM AEB A1B AOB AOW AOK
2
Red AEH AED AOD AEA A1A AOA AOV AOJ
Short w/ Yellow — — AUY — — AUQ — —
Drain Red — — AUR — — AUP — —
1
Yellow — — AUM — — AUB — —
Red — — AUD — — AUA — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow — — AVM — — AVB — —
2
Drain Red — — AVD — — AVA — —
Yellow — — AWM — — AWB — —
Mercury 3
Red — — AWD — — AWA — —
Short w/ Yellow — — AXY — — AXQ — —
Drain Red — — AXR — — AXP — —
1
Yellow — — AXM — — AXB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red — — AXD — — AXA — —
Drain Yellow — — AYM — — AYB — —
2
Red — — AYD — — AYA — —
Short w/ Yellow AFE AFY APY AFQ — APQ — —
Heater Red AFG AFR APR AFP — APP — —
1
Yellow AFF AFM APM AFB — APB — —
Red AFH AFD APD AFA — APA — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow AGF AGM AQM AGB — AQB — —
2
Heater Red AGH AGD AQD AGA — AQA — —
Yellow AHF AHM ARM AHB — ARB — —
3
Red AHH AHD ARD AHA — ARA — —
Short w/ Yellow AIE AIY ASY AIQ — ASQ — —
Heater Red AIG AIR ASR AIP — ASP — —
1
Yellow AIF AIM ASM AIB — ASB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red AIH AID ASD AIA — ASA — —
Heater Yellow AJF AJM ATM AJB — ATB — —
2
Red AJH AJD ATD AJA — ATA — —
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

22 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


9.1 Type 4, 4X, 7, 9 and Group B Enclosure Codes

Housing Type 4 Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X/7/9


Switch Switch Set Magnet Type 7/9 Type 4X/7/9 Group B
Height Carbon Carbon Cast Alum Cast Alum Group B
Type Contacts Points Dot Color Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Iron
& Options Steel Steel 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 Cast Alum
Yellow BAE BAY BKY BAQ B2Q BKQ — BKS
Short
Red BAG BAR BKR BAP B2P BKP — BKT
1
Yellow BAF BAM BKM BAB B2B BKB BKW BKK
Red BAH BAD BKD BAA B2A BKA BKV BKJ
SPDT
Yellow BBF BBM BLM BBB B4B BLB BLW BLK
Tall 2
Red BBH BBD BLD BBA B4A BLA BLV BLJ
Yellow BCF BCM BMM BCB B6B BMB BMW BMK
3
Red BCH BCD BMD BCA B6A BMA BMV BMJ
Yellow BDE BDY BNY BDQ B8Q BNQ — BNS
Short
Red BDG BDR BNR BDP B8P BNP — BNT
1
Yellow BDF BDM BNM BDB B8B BNB BNW BNK
DPDT
Red BDH BDD BND BDA B8A BNA BNV BNJ
Tall
Yellow BEF BEM BOM BEB B1B BOB BOW BOK
2
Red BEH BED BOD BEA B1A BOA BOV BOJ
Short w/ Yellow — — BUY — — BUQ — —
Drain Red — — BUR — — BUP — —
1
Yellow — — BUM — — BUB — —
Red — — BUD — — BUA — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow — — BVM — — BVB — —
2
Drain Red — — BVD — — BVA — —
Yellow — — BWM — — BWB — —
3
Red — — BWD — — BWA — —
Short w/ Yellow — — BXY — — BXQ — —
Drain Red — — BXR — — BXP — —
1
Yellow — — BXM — — BXB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red — — BXD — — BXA — —
Drain Yellow — — BYM — — BYB — —
2
Red — — BYD — — BYA — —
Dry Contact
Short w/ Yellow BFE BFY BPY BFQ — BPQ — —
Heater Red BFG BFR BPR BFP — BPP — —
1
Yellow BFF BFM BPM BFB — BPB — —
Red BFH BFD BPD BFA — BPA — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow BGF BGM BQM BGB — BQB — —
2
Heater Red BGH BGD BQD BGA — BQA — —
Yellow BHF BHM BRM BHB — BRB — —
3
Red BHH BHD BRD BHA — BRA — —
Short w/ Yellow BIE BIY BSY BIQ — BSQ — —
Heater Red BIG BIR BSR BIP — BSP — —
1
Yellow BIF BIM BSM BIB — BSB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red BIH BID BSD BIA — BSA — —
Heater Yellow BJF BJM BTM BJB — BTB — —
2
Red BJH BJD BTD BJA — BTA — —
Yellow CAE CAY CKY CAQ C2Q CKQ — CKS
Short
Red CAG CAR CKR CAP C2P CKP — CKT
1
Yellow CAF CAM CKM CAB C2B CKB CKW CKK
Red CAH CAD CKD CAA C2A CKA CKV CKJ
SPDT
Yellow CBF CBM CLM CBB C4B CLB CLW CLK
Tall 2
Red CBH CBD CLD CBA C4A CLA CLV CLJ
Yellow CCF CCM CMM CCB C6B CMB CMW CMK
3
Red CCH CCD CMD CCA C6A CMA CMV CMJ
Yellow CDE CDY CNY CDQ C8Q CNQ — CNS
Short
Red CDG CDR CNR CDP C8P CNP — CNT
1
Yellow CDF CDM CNM CDB C8B CNB CNW CNK
DPDT
Red CDH CDD CND CDA C8A CNA CNV CNJ
Tall
Yellow CEF CEM COM CEB C1B COB COW COK
2
Red CEH CED COD CEA C1A COA COV COJ
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 23


9.1 Type 4, 4X, 7, 9 and Group B Enclosure Codes

Housing Type 4 Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X/7/9


Switch Switch Set Magnet Type 7/9 Type 4X/7/9 Group B
Height Carbon Carbon Cast Alum Cast Alum Group B
Type Contacts Points Dot Color Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Iron
& Options Steel Steel 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 Cast Alum
Short w/ Yellow — — CUY — — CUQ — —
Drain Red — — CUR — — CUP — —
1
Yellow — — CUM — — CUB — —
Red — — CUD — — CUA — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow — — CVM — — CVB — —
2
Drain Red — — CVD — — CVA — —
Yellow — — CWM — — CWB — —
3
Red — — CWD — — CWA — —
Short w/ Yellow — — CXY — — CXQ — —
Drain Red — — CXR — — CXP — —
1
Yellow — — CXM — — CXB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red — — CXD — — CXA — —
Drain Yellow — — CYM — — CYB — —
2
Red — — CYD — — CYA — —
Dry Contact
Short w/ Yellow CFE CFY — CFQ — — — —
Heater Red CFG CFR — CFP — — — —
1
Yellow CFF CFM — CFB — — — —
Red CFH CFD — CFA — — — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow CGF CGM — CGB — — — —
2
Heater Red CGH CGD — CGA — — — —
Yellow CHF CHM — CHB — — — —
3
Red CHH CHD — CHA — — — —
Short w/ Yellow CIE CIY — CIQ — — — —
Heater Red CIG CIR — CIP — — — —
1
Yellow CIF CIM — CIB — — — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red CIH CID — CIA — — — —
Heater Yellow CJF CJM — CJB — — — —
2
Red CJH CJD — CJA — — — —
Short Yellow DAE DAY DKY DAQ D2Q DKQ — DKS
1
Yellow DAF DAM DKM DAB D2B DKB DKW DKK
SPDT
Tall 2 Yellow DBF DBM DLM DBB D4B DLB DLW DLK
3 Yellow DCF DCM DMM DCB D6B DMB DMW DMK
Short Yellow DDE DDY DNY DDQ D8Q DNQ — DNS
1
DPDT Yellow DDF DDM DNM DDB D8B DNB DNW DNK
Tall
2 Yellow DEF DEM DOM DEB D1B DOB DOW DOK
Short w/
Yellow — — DUY — — DUQ — —
Drain 1
SPDT Yellow — — DUM — — DUB — —
Tall w/
2 Yellow — — DVM — — DVB — —
Drain
3 Yellow — — DWM — — DWB — —
DC Voltage
Dry Contact Short w/
Yellow — — DXY — — DXQ — —
Drain 1
DPDT
Tall w/ Yellow — — DXM — — DXB — —
Drain 2 Yellow — — DYM — — DYB — —
Short w/
Yellow DFE DFY DPY DFQ — DPQ — —
Heater 1
SPDT Yellow DFF DFM DPM DFB — DPB — —
Tall w/
2 Yellow DGF DGM DQM DGB — DQB — —
Heater
3 Yellow DHF DHM DRM DHB — DRB — —
Short w/
Yellow DIE DIY DSY DIQ — DSQ — —
Heater 1
DPDT
Tall w/ Yellow DIF DIM DSM DIB — DSB — —
Heater 2 Yellow DJF DJM DTM DJB — DTB — —
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

24 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


9.1 Type 4, 4X, 7, 9 and Group B Enclosure Codes

Housing Type 4 Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X/7/9


Switch Switch Set Magnet Type 7/9 Type 4X/7/9 Group B
Height Carbon Carbon Cast Alum Cast Alum Group B
Type Contacts Points Dot Color Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Iron
& Options Steel Steel 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 Cast Alum
Yellow EAE EAY EKY EAQ — EKQ — EKS
Short
Red EAG EAR EKR EAP — EKP — EKT
1
Yellow EAF EAM EKM EAB — EKB EKW EKK
Red EAH EAD EKD EAA — EKA EKV EKJ
SPDT
Yellow EBF EBM ELM EBB — ELB ELW ELK
Tall 2
Red EBH EBD ELD EBA — ELA ELV ELJ
Yellow ECF ECM EMM ECB — EMB EMW EMK
3
Red ECH ECD EMD ECA — EMA EMV EMJ
Yellow EDE EDY ENY EDQ — ENQ — ENS
Short
Red EDG EDR ENR EDP — ENP — ENT
1
Yellow EDF EDM ENM EDB — ENB ENW ENK
DPDT
Red EDH EDD END EDA — ENA ENV ENJ
Tall
Yellow EEF EEM EOM EEB — EOB EOW EOK
2
Red EEH EED EOD EEA — EOA EOV EOJ
Short w/ Yellow — — EUY — — EUQ — —
Drain Red — — EUR — — EUP — —
1
Yellow — — EUM — — EUB — —
Red — — EUD — — EUA — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow — — EVM — — EVB — —
2
Drain Red — — EVD — — EVA — —
Vibration Yellow — — EWM — — EWB — —
Resistant 3
Red — — EWD — — EWA — —
Mercury
Short w/ Yellow — — EXY — — EXQ — —
Drain Red — — EXR — — EXP — —
1
Yellow — — EXM — — EXB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red — — EXD — — EXA — —
Drain Yellow — — EYM — — EYB — —
2
Red — — EYD — — EYA — —
Short w/ Yellow EFE EFY EPY EFQ — EPQ — —
Heater Red EFG EFR EPR EFP — EPP — —
1
Yellow EFF EFM EPM EFB — EPB — —
Red EFH EFD EPD EFA — EPA — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow EGF EGM EQM EGB — EQB — —
2
Heater Red EGH EGD EQD EGA — EQA — —
Yellow EHF EHM ERM EHB — ERB — —
3
Red EHH EHD ERD EHA — ERA — —
Short w/ Yellow EIE EIY ESY EIQ — ESQ — —
Heater Red EIG EIR ESR EIP — ESP — —
1
Yellow EIF EIM ESM EIB — ESB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red EIH EID ESD EIA — ESA — —
Heater Yellow EJF EJM ETM EJB — ETB — —
2
Red EJH EJD ETD EJA — ETA — —
Yellow FAE FAY FKY FAQ F2Q FKQ — FKS
Short
Red FAG FAR FKR FAP F2P FKP — FKT
1
Yellow FAF FAM FKM FAB FCB FKB FKW FKK
SPDT
Red FAH FAD FKD FAA FCA FKA FKV FKJ
Tall
Yellow FBF FBM FLM FBB FFB FLB FLW FLK
2
Herm. Sealed Red FBH FBD FLD FBA FFA FLA FLV FLJ
Dry Contact Yellow FDE FDY FNY FDQ F8Q FNQ — FNS
Short
Red FDG FDR FNR FDP F8P FNP — FNT
1
Yellow FDF FDM FNM FDB FGB FNB FNW FNK
DPDT
Red FDH FDD FND FDA FGA FNA FNV FNJ
Tall
Yellow FEF FEM FOM FEB FHB FOB FOW FOK
2
Red FEH FED FOD FEA FHA FOA FOV FOJ
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 25


9.1 Type 4, 4X, 7, 9 and Group B Enclosure Codes

Housing Type 4 Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X/7/9


Switch Switch Set Magnet Type 7/9 Type 4X/7/9 Group B
Height Carbon Carbon Cast Alum Cast Alum Group B
Type Contacts Points Dot Color Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Iron
& Options Steel Steel 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 Cast Alum
Yellow GAF GAM GKM — — — GKW —
SPDT
Red GAH GAD GKD — — — GKV —
Tall
Yellow GDF GDM GNM — — — GNW —
DPDT
Dual Magnet Red GDH GDD GND — — — GNV —
1
Dry Contact Yellow — — GUM — — — — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Red — — GUD — — — — —
Drain Yellow — — GXM — — — — —
DPDT
Red — — GXD — — — — —
Yellow HAF HAM HKM — — — HKW —
SPDT
Red HAH HAD HKD — — — HKV —
Tall
Yellow HDF HDM HNM — — — HNW —
DPDT
Dual Magnet Red HDH HDD HND — — — HNV —
1
Dry Contact Yellow — — HUM — — — — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Red — — HUD — — — — —
Drain Yellow — — HXM — — — — —
DPDT
Red — — HXD — — — — —
Yellow IAF IAM IKM — — — IKW —
SPDT
Red IAH IAD IKD — — — IKV —
Tall
Yellow IDF IDM INM — — — INW —
DC Voltage DPDT
Red IDH IDD IND — — — INV —
Dual Magnet 1
Dry Contact Yellow — — IUM — — — — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Red — — IUD — — — — —
Drain Yellow — — IXM — — — — —
DPDT
Red — — IXD — — — — —
SPDT LAF LAM LKM LAB L2B LKB LKW LKK
High Temp DPDT LDF LDM LNM LDB L8B LNB LNW LNK
Mercury Tall 1 Yellow
for B40 SPDT LBF LBM LLM LBB — LLB LLW LLK
DPDT LEF LEM LOM LEB — LOB LOW LOK
Yellow MAE MAY — — — — — —
Short
Red MAG MAR — — — — — —
1
Yellow MAF MAM — — — — — —
Red MAH MAD — — — — — —
High Temp Yellow MBF MBM — — — — — —
SPDT
Mercury 2 Red MBH MBD — — — — — —
Tall
with R/B — MBE — — — — — —
Manual Reset* Yellow MCF MCM — — — — — —
*All Housing 3 Red MCH MCD — — — — — —
on manual
reset switches R/B/B — MCE — — — — — —
Type/NEMA 1 Yellow MDE MDY — — — — — —
only. Short
Red MDG MDR — — — — — —
1
Yellow MDF MDM — — — — — —
DPDT
Red MDH MDD — — — — — —
Tall
Yellow MEF MEM — — — — — —
2
Red MEH MED — — — — — —
SPDT NCF NCM NMM NCB — NMB NMI NMN
X-Tall
DPDT NEF NEM NKM NEB — NKB NKI NKN
Mercury SPDT NHF NHM NRM NHB — NRB — —
X-Tall w/
for 3 Yellow
Heater DPDT NJF NJM NLM NJB — NLB — —
C10/C15
X-Tall w/ SPDT — — NWM — — NWB — —
Drain DPDT — — NNM — — NNB — —
SPDT OCF OCM OMM OCB — OMB OMI OMN
X-Tall
DPDT OEF OEM OKM OEB — OKB OKI OKN
Dry Contact SPDT OHF OHM ORM OHB — ORB — —
X-Tall w/
for 3 Yellow
Heater DPDT OJF OJM OLM OJB — OLB — —
C10/C15
X-Tall w/ SPDT — — OWM — — OWB — —
Drain DPDT — — ONM — — ONB — —
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

26 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


9.1 Type 4, 4X, 7, 9 and Group B Enclosure Codes

Housing Type 4 Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X/7/9


Switch Switch Set Magnet Type 7/9 Type 4X/7/9 Group B
Height Carbon Carbon Cast Alum Cast Alum Group B
Type Contacts Points Dot Color Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Iron
& Options Steel Steel 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 Cast Alum
SPDT QCF QCM QMM QCB — QMB QMI QMN
X-Tall
DPDT QEF QEM QKM QEB — QKB QKI QKN
Dry Contact SPDT QHF QHM QRM QHB — QRB — —
X-Tall w/
for 3 Yellow
Heater DPDT QJF QJM QLM QJB — QLB — —
C10/C15
X-Tall w/ SPDT — — QWM — — QWB — —
Drain DPDT — — QNM — — QNB — —
Dry Contact SPDT SAF SAM SKM SAB S2B SKB SKW SKK
for B40 DPDT SDF SDM SNM SDB S8B SNB SNW SNK
Tall 1 Yellow
DC Dry Contact SPDT SBF SBM SLM SBB S2R SLB SLW SLK
for B40 DPDT SEF SEM SOM SEB S8R SOB SOW SOK
SPDT TCF TCM TMM TCB — TMB TMI TMN
Vibration X-Tall
DPDT TEF TEM TKM TEB — TKB TKI TKN
Resistant SPDT THF THM TRM THB — TRB — —
X-Tall w/
Mercury 3 Yellow
Heater DPDT TJF TJM TLM TJB — TLB — —
For
C10/C15 X-Tall w/ SPDT — — TWM — — TWB — —
Drain DPDT — — TNM — — TNB — —
Yellow UAE UAY UKY UAQ U2Q UKQ — —
Short
Red UAG UAR UKR UAP U2P UKP — —
1
Yellow UAF UAM UKM UAB U2B UKB UKW —
Red UAH UAD UKD UAA U2A UKA — —
SPDT
Yellow UBF UBM ULM UBB U4B ULB ULW —
Tall 2
Red UBH UBD ULD UBA U4A ULA — —
Yellow UCF UCM UMM UCB U6B UMB UMW —
3
Red UCH UCD UMD UCA U6A UMA — —
Yellow UDE UDY UNY UDQ U8Q UNQ — —
Short
Red UDG UDR UNR UDP U8P UNP — —
1
Yellow UDF UDM UNM UDB U8B UNB UNW —
DPDT
Red UDH UDD UND UDA U8A UNA — —
Tall
Dry Yellow UEF UEM UOM UEB U1B UOB UOW —
2
Contact Red UEH UED UOD UEA U1A UOA — —
w/Gold Alloy Short w/ Yellow — — — — — UUQ — —
Contacts Drain Red — — — — — — — —
1
Yellow — — UUM — — UUB — —
Red — — UUD — — — — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow — — UVM — — UVB — —
2
Drain Red — — UVD — — — — —
Yellow — — UWM — — UWB — —
3
Red — — UWD — — — — —
Short w/ Yellow — — — — — UXQ — —
Drain Red — — — — — — — —
1
Yellow — — UXM — — UXB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red — — UXD — — — — —
Drain Yellow — — UYM — — UYB — —
2
Red — — UYD — — — — —
Yellow WAE WAY WKY WAQ W2Q WKQ — WKS
Short
Red WAG WAR WKR WAP W2P WKP — WKT
1
Yellow WAF WAM WKM WAB W2B WKB WKW WKK
Red WAH WAD WKD WAA W2A WKA — —
SPDT
Hermetically Yellow WBF WBM WLM WBB W4B WLB WLW WLK
Tall 2
Sealed Red WBH WBD WLD WBA W4A WLA — —
Dry Contact Yellow WCF WCM WMM WCB W6B WMB WMW WMK
3
Red WCH WCD WMD WCA W6A WMA — —
Short Yellow WDE WDY WNY WDQ W8Q WNQ — WNS
1
DPDT Yellow WDF WDM WNM WDB W8B WNB WNW WNK
Tall
2 Yellow WEF WEM WOM WEB W1B WOB WOW WOK
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 27


9.1 Type 4, 4X, 7, 9 and Group B Enclosure Codes

Housing Type 4 Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X/7/9


Switch Switch Set Magnet Type 7/9 Type 4X/7/9 Group B
Height Carbon Carbon Cast Alum Cast Alum Group B
Type Contacts Points Dot Color Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Iron
& Options Steel Steel 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 Cast Alum
Short w/ Yellow — — — — — WUQ — —
Drain Red — — — — — WUP — —
1
Yellow — — WUM — — WUB — —
Red — — WUD — — WUA — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow — — WVM — — WVB — —
Hermetically 2
Drain Red — — WVD — — WVA — —
Sealed
Yellow — — WWM — — WWB — —
Dry Contact 3
Red — — WWD — — WWA — —
Short w/
— — — — — WXQ — —
Drain 1
DPDT Yellow
Tall w/ — — WXM — — WXB — —
Drain 2 — — WYM — — — — —
Yellow XAE XAY XKY XAQ X2Q XKQ — XKS
Short
Red XAG XAR XKR XAP X2P XKP — XKT
1
Yellow XAF XAM XKM XAB X2B XKB XKW XKK
Red XAH XAD XKD XAA X2A XKA — —
SPDT
Yellow XBF XBM XLM XBB X4B XLB XLW XLK
Tall 2
Red XBH XBD XLD XBA X4A XLA — —
Yellow XCF XCM XMM XCB X6B XMB XMW XMK
3
Red XCH XCD XMD XCA X6A XMA — —
Short XDE XDY XNY XDQ X8Q XNQ — XNS
1
DPDT Yellow XDF XDM XNM XDB X8B XNB XNW XNK
Hermetically Tall
2 XEF XEM XOM XEB X1B XOB XOW XOK
Sealed
Short w/ Yellow — — — — — XUQ — —
Dry Contact
w/Gold Drain Red — — — — — XUP — —
1
Yellow — — XUM — — XUB — —
Red — — XUD — — XUA — —
SPDT
Tall w/ Yellow — — XVM — — XVB — —
2
Drain Red — — XVD — — XVA — —
Yellow — — XWM — — XWB — —
3
Red — — XWD — — XWA — —
Short w/
— — — — — XXQ — —
Drain 1
DPDT Yellow
Tall w/ — — XXM — — XXB — —
Drain 2 — — XYM — — X4B — —
Yellow 2AE 2AY 2KY 2AQ 22Q 2KQ — 2KS
Short
Red 2AG 2AR 2KR 2AP 22P 2KP — 2KT
1
Yellow 2AF 2AM 2KM 2AB 22B 2KB 2KW 2KK
Red 2AH 2AD 2KD 2AA 22A 2KA 2KV 2KJ
Yellow 2BF 2BM 2LM 2BB 24B 2LB 2LW 2LK
SPDT
2 Red 2BH 2BD 2LD 2BA 24A 2LA 2LV 2LJ
Tall
High Temp R/B — — — 2BE 24E 2LE — 2LG
Vibration Yellow 2CF 2CM 2MM 2CB 26B 2MB 2MW 2MK
Resistant 3 Red 2CH 2CD 2MD 2CA 26A 2MA 2MV 2MJ
Mercury R/B/B — — — 2CE 26E 2ME — 2MG
Yellow 2DE 2DY 2NY 2DQ 28Q 2NQ — 2NS
Short
Red 2DG 2DR 2NR 2DP 28P 2NP — 2NT
1
Yellow 2DF 2DM 2NM 2DB 28B 2NB 2NW 2NK
DPDT
Red 2DH 2DD 2ND 2DA 28A 2NA 2NV 2NJ
Tall
Yellow 2EF 2EM 2OM 2EB 21B 2OB 2OW 2OK
2
Red 2EH 2ED 2OD 2EA 21A 2OA 2OV 2OJ
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

28 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


9.1 Type 4, 4X, 7, 9 and Group B Enclosure Codes

Housing Type 4 Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X/7/9


Switch Switch Set Magnet Type 7/9 Type 4X/7/9 Group B
Height Carbon Carbon Cast Alum Cast Alum Group B
Type Contacts Points Dot Color Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Iron
& Options Steel Steel 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 Cast Alum
Short w/ Yellow — — 2UY — — 2UQ — —
Drain Red — — 2UR — — 2UP — —
1
Yellow — — 2UM — — 2UB — —
Red — — 2UD — — 2UA — —
Yellow — — 2VM — — 2VB — —
SPDT
Tall w/ 2 Red — — 2VD — — 2VA — —
Drain R/B — — — — — 2VE — —
Yellow — — 2WM — — 2WB — —
3 Red — — 2WD — — 2WA — —
R/B/B — — — — — 2WE — —
Short w/ Yellow — — 2XY — — 2XQ — —
Drain Red — — 2XR — — 2XP — —
1
Yellow — — 2XM — — 2XB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red — — 2XD — — 2XA — —
High Temp Drain Yellow — — 2YM — — 2YB — —
2
Vibration Red — — 2YD — — 2YA — —
Resistant Short w/ Yellow 2FE 2FY 2PY 2FQ — 2PQ — —
Mercury Heater Red 2FG 2FR 2PR 2FP — 2PP — —
1
Yellow 2FF 2FM 2PM 2FB — 2PB — —
Red 2FH 2FD 2PD 2FA — 2PA — —
Yellow 2GF 2GM 2QM 2GB — 2QB — —
SPDT
Tall w/ 2 Red 2GH 2GD 2QD 2GA — 2QA — —
Heater R/B — — — — — 2QE — —
Yellow 2HF 2HM 2RM 2HB — 2RB — —
3 Red 2HH 2HD 2RD 2HA — 2RA — —
R/B/B — — — — — 2RE — —
Short w/ Yellow 2IE 2IY 2SY 2IQ — 2SQ — —
Heater Red 2IG 2IR 2SR 2IP — 2SP — —
1
Yellow 2IF 2IM 2SM 2IB — 2SB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red 2IH 2ID 2SD 2IA — 2SA — —
Heater Yellow 2JF 2JM 2TM 2JB — 2TB — —
2
Red 2JH 2JD 2TD 2JA — 2TA — —
Yellow 3AE 3AY 3KY 3AQ 32Q 3KQ — 3KS
Short
Red 3AG 3AR 3KR 3AP 32P 3KP — 3KT
1
Yellow 3AF 3AM 3KM 3AB 32B 3KB 3KW 3KK
Red 3AH 3AD 3KD 3AA 32A 3KA 3KV 3KJ
Yellow 3BF 3BM 3LM 3BB 34B 3LB 3LW 3LK
SPDT
2 Red 3BH 3BD 3LD 3BA 34A 3LA 3LV 3LJ
Tall
R/B — — — 3BE 34E 3LE — 3LG
High Temp Yellow 3CF 3CM 3MM 3CB 36B 3MB 3MW 3MK
Mercury 3 Red 3CH 3CD 3MD 3CA 36A 3MA 3MV 3MJ
R/B/B — — — 3CE 36E 3ME — 3MG
Yellow 3DE 3DY 3NY 3DQ 38Q 3NQ — 3NS
Short
Red 3DG 3DR 3NR 3DP 38P 3NP — 3NT
1
Yellow 3DF 3DM 3NM 3DB 38B 3NB 3NW 3NK
DPDT
Red 3DH 3DD 3ND 3DA 38A 3NA 3NV 3NJ
Tall
Yellow 3EF 3EM 3OM 3EB 31B 3OB 3OW 3OK
2
Red 3EH 3ED 3OD 3EA 31A 3OA 3OV 3OJ
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 29


9.1 Type 4, 4X, 7, 9 and Group B Enclosure Codes

Housing Type 4 Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X Type 4X/7/9


Switch Switch Set Magnet Type 7/9 Type 4X/7/9 Group B
Height Carbon Carbon Cast Alum Cast Alum Group B
Type Contacts Points Dot Color Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Iron
& Options Steel Steel 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 Cast Alum
Short w/ Yellow — — 3UY — — 3UQ — —
Drain Red — — 3UR — — 3UP — —
1
Yellow — — 3UM — — 3UB — —
Red — — 3UD — — 3UA — —
Yellow — — 3VM — — 3VB — —
SPDT
Tall w/ 2 Red — — 3VD — — 3VA — —
Drain R/B — — — — — 3VE — —
Yellow — — 3WM — — 3WB — —
3 Red — — 3WD — — 3WA — —
R/B/B — — — — — 3WE — —
Short w/ Yellow — — 3XY — — 3XQ — —
Drain Red — — 3XR — — 3XP — —
1
Yellow — — 3XM — — 3XB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red — — 3XD — — 3XA — —
Drain Yellow — — 3YM — — 3YB — —
2
High Temp Red — — 3YD — — 3YA — —
Mercury Short w/ Yellow 3FE 3FY 3PY 3FQ — 3PQ — —
Heater Red 3FG 3FR 3PR 3FP — 3PP — —
1
Yellow 3FF 3FM 3PM 3FB — 3PB — —
Red 3FH 3FD 3PD 3FA — 3PA — —
Yellow 3GF 3GM 3QM 3GB — 3QB — —
SPDT
Tall w/ 2 Red 3GH 3GD 3QD 3GA — 3QA — —
Heater R/B — — — — — 3QE — —
Yellow 3HF 3HM 3RM 3HB — 3RB — —
3 Red 3HH 3HD 3RD 3HA — 3RA — —
R/B/B — — — — — 3RE — —
Short w/ Yellow 3IE 3IY 3SY 3IQ — 3SQ — —
Heater Red 3IG 3IR 3SR 3IP — 3SP — —
1
Yellow 3IF 3IM 3SM 3IB — 3SB — —
DPDT
Tall w/ Red 3IH 3ID 3SD 3IA — 3SA — —
Heater Yellow 3JF 3JM 3TM 3JB — 3TB — —
2
Red 3JH 3JD 3TD 3JA — 3TA — —
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

30 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


9.2 ATEX Enclosure Codes

Housing ATEX XP ATEX XP ATEX XP ATEX XP ATEX IS ATEX IS


Switch Switch Set Magnet
Height Cast Iron Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Alum Cast Alum Cast Alum
Type Contacts Points Dot Color
& Options 3/4" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5
Yellow — — AA9 AH9 — —
Short
Red — — AAC AHC — —
1
Yellow AU5 AK5 AC9 AK9 — —
Red AU7 AK7 ACC AKC — —
SPDT
Yellow AV5 AL5 AD9 AL9 — —
Tall 2
Red AV7 AL7 ADC ALC — —
Yellow A75 A65 AE9 AM9 — —
Mercury 3
Red A77 A67 AEC AMC — —
Yellow — — AB9 AJ9 — —
Short
Red — — ABC AJC — —
1
Yellow AW5 AD5 AF9 AN9 — —
DPDT
Red AW7 AD7 AFC ANC — —
Tall
Yellow AY5 AO5 AG9 AP9 — —
2
Red AY7 AO7 AGC APC — —
Yellow — — BA9 BH9 — —
Short
Red — — BAC BHC — —
1
Yellow BU5 BK5 BC9 BK9 — —
Red BU7 BK7 BCC BKC — —
SPDT
Yellow BV5 BL5 BD9 BL9 — —
Tall 2
Red BV7 BL7 BDC BLC — —
Yellow B75 B65 BE9 BM9 — —
Dry Contact 3
Red B77 B67 BEC BMC — —
Yellow — — BB9 BJ9 — —
Short
Red — — BBC BJC — —
1
Yellow BW5 BD5 BF9 BN9 — —
DPDT
Red BW7 BD7 BFC BNC — —
Tall
Yellow BY5 BO5 BG9 BP9 — —
2
Red BY7 BO7 BGC BPC — —
Yellow — — CA9 CH9 CAS C2S
Short
Red — — CAC CHC CAL C2L
1
Yellow CU5 CK5 CC9 CK9 CAT C2T
Red CU7 CK7 CCC CKC CAX C2X
SPDT
Yellow CV5 CL5 CD9 CL9 CBT C4T
Tall 2
Red CV7 CL7 CDC CLC CBX C4X
Yellow C75 C65 CE9 CM9 — —
Dry Contact 3
Red C77 C67 CEC CMC — —
Yellow — — CB9 CJ9 CDS C8S
Short
Red — — CBC CJC CDL C8L
1
Yellow CW5 CD5 CF9 CN9 CDT C8T
DPDT
Red CW7 CD7 CFC CNC CDX C8X
Tall
Yellow CY5 CO5 CG9 CP9 CET C1T
2
Red CY7 CO7 CGC CPC CEX C1X
Short Yellow — — DA9 DH9 — —
1
Yellow DU5 DK5 DC9 DK9 — —
SPDT
Tall 2 Yellow DV5 DL5 DD9 DL9 — —
DC Voltage
3 Yellow D75 D65 DE9 DM9 — —
Dry Contact
Short Yellow — — DB9 DJ9 — —
1
DPDT Yellow DW5 DD5 DF9 DN9 — —
Tall
2 Yellow DY5 DO5 DG9 DP9 — —
Yellow — — EA9 EH9 — —
Short
Red — — EAC EHC — —
1
Yellow EU5 EK5 EC9 EK9 — —
Vibration Red EU7 EK7 ECC EKC — —
Resistant SPDT
Mercury Yellow EV5 EL5 ED9 EL9 — —
Tall 2
Red EV7 EL7 EDC ELC — —
Yellow E75 E65 EE9 EM9 — —
3
Red E77 E67 EEC EMC — —
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 31


9.2 ATEX Enclosure Codes

Housing ATEX XP ATEX XP ATEX XP ATEX XP ATEX IS ATEX IS


Switch Switch Set Magnet
Height Cast Iron Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Alum Cast Alum Cast Alum
Type Contacts Points Dot Color
& Options 3/4" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5
Yellow — — EB9 EJ9 — —
Short
Red — — EBC EJC — —
Vibration 1
Yellow EW5 ED5 EF9 EN9 — —
Resistant DPDT
Mercury Red EW7 ED7 EFC ENC — —
Tall
Yellow EY5 EO5 EG9 EP9 — —
2
Red EY7 EO7 EGC EPC — —
Yellow — — FA9 FH9 — —
Short
Red — — FAC FHC — —
1
Yellow FU5 FK5 FC9 FK9 — —
Red FU7 FK7 FCC FKC — —
SPDT
Yellow FV5 FL5 FD9 FL9 — —
Tall 2
Red FV7 FL7 FDC FLC — —
Herm. Sealed Yellow — — — — — —
3
Dry Contact Red — — — — — —
Yellow — — FB9 FJ9 — —
Short
Red — — FBC FJC — —
1
Yellow FW5 FD5 FF9 FN9 — —
DPDT
Red FW7 FD7 FFC FNC — —
Tall
Yellow FY5 FO5 FG9 FP9 — —
2
Red FY7 FO7 FGC FPC — —
SPDT — — LC9 LK9 — —
High Temp DPDT — — LF9 LN9 — —
Mercury Tall 1 Yellow
for B40 SPDT — — LA9 LH9 — —
DPDT — — LB9 LJ9 — —
Dry Contact SPDT — — SA9 SH9 — —
for B40 DPDT — — SB9 SJ9 — —
Tall 1 Yellow
DC Dry Contact SPDT — — SC9 SK9 — —
for B40 DPDT — — SF9 SN9 — —
Yellow — — UA9 UH9 UAS U2S
Short
Red — — UAC UHC UAL U2L
1
Yellow UU5 UK5 UC9 UK9 UAT U2T
Red UU7 UK7 UCC UKC UAX U2X
SPDT
Yellow UV5 UL5 UD9 UL9 UBT U4T
Tall 2
Dry Red UV7 UL7 UDC ULC UBX U4X
Contact Yellow U75 U65 UE9 UM9 UCT ULT
3
w/Gold Alloy Red U77 U67 UEC UMC UCX ULX
Contacts Yellow — — UB9 UJ9 UDS U8S
Short
Red — — UBC UJC UDL U8L
1
Yellow UW5 UD5 UF9 UN9 UDT U8T
DPDT
Red UW7 UD7 UFC UNC UDX U8X
Tall
Yellow UY5 UO5 UG9 UP9 UET U1T
2
Red UY7 UO7 UGC UPC UEX U1X
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

32 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


9.2 ATEX Enclosure Codes

Housing ATEX XP ATEX XP ATEX XP ATEX XP ATEX IS ATEX IS


Switch Switch Set Magnet
Height Cast Iron Cast Iron Cast Alum Cast Alum Cast Alum Cast Alum
Type Contacts Points Dot Color
& Options 3/4" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5 1" NPT M20 ¥ 1.5
Yellow — — WA9 WH9 WAS W2S
Short
Red — — WAC WHC WAL W2L
1
Yellow WU5 WK5 WC9 WK9 WAT W2T
Red WU7 WK7 WCC WKC WAX W2X
SPDT
Yellow WV5 WL5 WD9 WL9 WBT W4T
Herm. Sealed Tall 2
Red WV7 WL7 WDC WLC WBX W4X
Dry Contact
Yellow W75 W65 WE9 WM9 — —
3
Red W77 W67 WEC WMC — —
Short Yellow — — WB9 WJ9 WDS W8S
1
DPDT Yellow WW5 WD5 WF9 WN9 WDT W8T
Tall
2 Yellow WY5 WO5 WG9 WP9 WET W1T
Yellow — — XA9 XH9 XAS X2S
Short
Red — — XAC XHC XAL X2L
1
Yellow XU5 XK5 XC9 XK9 XAT X2T
Red XU7 XK7 XCC XKC XAX X2X
SPDT
Herm. Sealed Yellow XV5 XL5 XD9 XL9 XBT X4T
Tall 2
Dry Contact Red XV7 XL7 XDC XLC XBX X4X
w/ Gold Yellow X75 X65 XE9 XM9 — —
3
Red X77 X67 XEC XMC — —
Short Yellow — — XB9 XJ9 XDS X8S
1
DPDT Yellow XW5 XD5 XF9 XN9 XDT X8T
Tall
2 Yellow XY5 XO5 XG9 XP9 XET X1T
Yellow — — 2A9 2H9 — —
Short
Red — — 2AC 2HC — —
1
Yellow 2U5 2K5 2C9 2K9 — —
Red 2U7 2K7 2CC 2KC — —
Yellow 2V5 2L5 2D9 2L9 — —
SPDT
2 Red — — 2DC 2LC — —
Tall
High Temp R/B 2V7 2L7 2DE 29E — —
Vibration Yellow 275 265 2E9 2M9 — —
Resistant 3 Red — — 2EC 2MC — —
Mercury R/B/B 277 267 2EE 28E — —
Yellow — — 2B9 2J9 — —
Short
Red — — 2BC 2JC — —
1
Yellow 2W5 2D5 2F9 2N9 — —
DPDT
Red 2W7 2D7 2FC 2NC — —
Tall
Yellow 2Y5 2O5 2G9 2P9 — —
2
Red 2Y7 2O7 2GC 2PC — —
Yellow — — 3A9 3H9 — —
Short
Red — — 3AC 3HC — —
1
Yellow 3U5 3K5 3C9 3K9 — —
Red 3U7 3K7 3CC 3KC — —
Yellow 3V5 3L5 3D9 3L9 — —
SPDT
2 Red — — 3DC 3LC — —
Tall
R/B 3V7 3L7 3DE 39E — —
High Temp Yellow 375 365 3E9 3M9 — —
Mercury 3 Red — — 3EC 3MC — —
R/B/B 377 367 3EE 38E — —
Yellow — — 3B9 3J9 — —
Short
Red — — 3BC 3JC — —
1
Yellow 3W5 3D5 3F9 3N9 — —
DPDT
Red 3W7 3D7 3FC 3NC — —
Tall
Yellow 3Y5 3O5 3G9 3P9 — —
2
Red 3Y7 3O7 3GC 3PC — —
The switch and housing codes in bold are currently valid and available. Those not in bold are no longer valid.

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 33


NOTES

34 42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms


NOTES

42-683 Electric Switch Mechanisms 35


ASSURED QUALITY & SERVICE COST LESS

Service Policy Return Material Procedure


Owners of Magnetrol may request the return of a control So that we may efficiently process any materials that are
or any part of a control for complete rebuilding or replace- returned, it is essential that a “Return Material
ment. They will be rebuilt or replaced promptly. Controls Authorization” (RMA) number be obtained from the
returned under our service policy must be returned by factory, prior to the material’s return. This is available
Prepaid transportation. Magnetrol will repair or replace through your Magnetrol local representative or
the control at no cost to the purchaser (or owner) other by contacting the factory. Please supply the following
than transportation if: information:
1. Returned within the warranty period; and 1. Company Name
2. The factory inspection finds the cause of the claim 2. Description of Material
to be covered under the warranty. 3. Serial Number
If the trouble is the result of conditions beyond our con- 4. Reason for Return
trol; or, is NOT covered by the warranty, there will be 5. Application
charges for labor and the parts required to rebuild or Any unit that was used in a process must be properly
replace the equipment. cleaned in accordance with OSHA standards, before it is
In some cases it may be expedient to ship replacement returned to the factory.
parts; or, in extreme cases a complete new control, to A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) must accompany
replace the original equipment before it is returned. If material that was used in any media.
this is desired, notify the factory of both the model and All shipments returned to the factory must be by prepaid
serial numbers of the control to be replaced. In such transportation.
cases, credit for the materials returned will be determined
on the basis of the applicability of our warranty. All replacements will be shipped F.O.B. factory.
No claims for misapplication, labor, direct or consequen-
tial damage will be allowed.

705 Enterprise Street • Aurora, Illinois 60504-8149 • 630-969-4000 • Fax 630-969-9489


info@magnetrol.com • www.magnetrol.com

Copyright © 2016 Magnetrol International, Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. BULLETIN: 42-683.19
EFFECTIVE: May 2016
SUPERSEDES: January 2016
HART® Installation and Operating
Manual for Eclipse® Model 706
Software Version 1.x

High Performance,
4th Generation
Guided Wave Radar
Level Transmitter

2014/68/EU
Read this Manual Before Installing WARNING! Explosion hazard. Do not connect or dis-
This manual provides information on the Eclipse® trans- connect designs rated Explosion proof or Non-incendive
mitter. It is important that all instructions are read care- unless power has been switched off and/or the area is
fully and followed in sequence. The QuickStart known to be non-hazardous.
Installation instructions are a brief guide to the sequence
of steps for experienced technicians to follow when Low Voltage Directive
installing the equipment. Detailed instructions are For use in Installations Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
included in the Complete Installation section of this manual. If equipment is used in a manner not specified by the
manufacturer, protection provided by equipment may be
Conventions Used in this Manual impaired.
Certain conventions are used in this manual to convey
specific types of information. General technical material, Notice of Copyright and Limitations
support data, and safety information are presented in Magnetrol® & Magnetrol® logotype and Eclipse®
narrative form. The following styles are used for notes, are registered trademarks of Magnetrol® International,
cautions, and warnings. Incorporated.
Copyright © 2018 Magnetrol® International, Incorporated.
NOTES
All rights reserved.
Notes contain information that augments or clarifies an
operating step. Notes do not normally contain actions. MAGNETROL reserves the right to make changes to the
They follow the procedural steps to which they refer. product described in this manual at any time without
notice. MAGNETROL makes no warranty with respect
Cautions to the accuracy of the information in this manual.
Cautions alert the technician to special conditions that
could injure personnel, damage equipment, or reduce Warranty
a component’s mechanical integrity. Cautions are also All MAGNETROL electronic level and flow controls are
used to alert the technician to unsafe practices or the warranted free of defects in materials or workmanship for
need for special protective equipment or specific eighteen months from the date of original factory ship-
materials. In this manual, a caution box indicates a ment. If returned within the warranty period; and, upon
potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, factory inspection of the control, the cause of the claim is
may result in minor or moderate injury. determined to be covered under the warranty; then,
WARNINGS MAGNETROL will repair or replace the control at no cost
Warnings identify potentially dangerous situations or to the purchaser (or owner) other than transportation.
serious hazards. In this manual, a warning indicates an MAGNETROL shall not be liable for misapplication,
imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, labor claims, direct or consequential damage or expense
could result in serious injury or death. arising from the installation or use of equipment. There
are no other warranties expressed or implied, except spe-
Safety Messages cial written warranties covering some MAGNETROL
The ECLIPSE system is designed for use in Category II, products.
Pollution Degree 2 installations. Follow all standard
industry procedures for servicing electrical and computer Quality Assurance
equipment when working with or around high voltage. The quality assurance system in place at MAGNETROL
Always shut off the power supply before touching any guarantees the highest level of quality throughout the
components. Although high voltage is not present in this company. MAGNETROL is committed to providing
system, it may be present in other systems. full customer satisfaction both in quality products and
quality service.
Electrical components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
To prevent equipment damage, observe safety procedures The MAGNETROL quality assurance system is registered
when working with electrostatic sensitive components. to ISO 9001 affirming its commitment to known interna-
tional quality standards providing the strongest assurance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. of product/service quality available.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


Eclipse® Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter
Table of Contents

1.0 QuickStart Installation 2.4.6 Installing the ECLIPSE Model 706


1.1 Getting Started..........................................................5 Transmitter...................................................23
1.1.1 Equipment and Tools .....................................5 2.4.6.1 Integral Mount ......................................23
1.1.2 Configuration Information.............................6 2.4.6.2 Remote Mount ......................................23
1.2 QuickStart Mounting................................................6 2.5 Wiring ....................................................................24
1.2.1 Probe..............................................................7 2.5.1 General Purpose or Non-Incendive
1.2.2 Transmitter.....................................................7 (CI I, Div 2) ..................................................24
1.3 QuickStart Wiring ....................................................8 2.5.2 Intrinsically Safe ...........................................25
1.4 QuickStart Configuration .........................................8 2.5.3 Explosion Proof............................................25
1.4.1 QuickStart Menu Options ...........................10 2.6 Configuration .........................................................26
1.4.1.1 QuickStart Numerical Data Entry.........11 2.6.1 Bench Configuration....................................26
2.6.2 Menu Traversal and Data Entry....................27
2.0 Complete Installation
2.6.2.1 Navigating the Menu.............................27
2.1 Unpacking ..............................................................12
2.6.2.2 Data Selection .......................................27
2.2 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
2.6.2.3 Entering Numeric Data Using
Handling Procedure ................................................12
Digit Entry............................................28
2.3 Before You Begin.....................................................13
2.6.2.4 Entering Numeric Data
2.3.1 Site Preparation ............................................13
Using Increment/Decrement .................28
2.3.2 Equipment and Tools ...................................13
2.6.2.5 Entering Character Data........................29
2.3.3 Operational Considerations..........................13
2.6.3 Password Protection .....................................29
2.4 Mounting................................................................14
2.6.4 Model 706 Menu: Step-By-Step Procedure ..30
2.4.1 Installing a Coaxial Probe.............................14
2.6.5 Model 706 Configuration Menu —
2.4.1.1 To install a coaxial probe .......................15
Device Setup ................................................32
2.4.2 Installing a Segmented Coaxial Probes .........15
2.7 Configuration Using HART® ..................................38
2.4.3 Installing a Caged Probe...............................16
2.7.1 Connections .................................................38
2.4.3.1 To install a caged probe .........................16
2.7.2 HART Communicator Display ....................38
2.4.4 Installing a Single Rod Probe .......................17
2.7.3 HART Revision Table ..................................38
2.4.4.1 To install a rigid single rod probe ..........18
2.7.4 HART Menu — Model 706 ........................38
2.4.4.2 To install a flexible single rod probe
for liquids ..............................................18 3.0 Reference Information
2.4.4.3 To install a flexible single rod probe 3.1 Transmitter Description ..........................................43
for solids................................................19 3.2 Theory of Operation...............................................43
2.4.5 Installing a Twin Flexible Probe....................20 3.2.1 Guided Wave Radar .....................................43
2.4.5.1 To install a Model 7y7 standard 3.2.2 Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR)............43
flexible twin rod probe ..........................20 3.2.3 Equivalent Time Sampling (ETS).................44
2.4.5.2 To install a Model 7y5 bulk solids 3.2.4 Interface Detection.......................................44
flexible twin rod probe ..........................21 3.2.5 Saturated Steam Applications .......................45
3.2.6 Overfill Capability........................................46

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 3


3.3 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics ............................46 3.6.9 Physical Specifications —
3.3.1 Diagnostics (Namur NE 107) ......................47 Single Rod Rigid Probes...............................79
3.3.2 Diagnostic Indication Simulation.................49 3.6.10 Physical Specifications —
3.3.3 Diagnostic Indication Table..........................49 Twin Rod Flexible Probes.............................79
3.3.4 Diagnostic Help ...........................................52 3.6.11 Power Supply Requirements .........................80
3.3.5 Troubleshooting Application Issues ..............53 3.6.11.1 Safe Operating Area...............................80
3.3.5.1 Model 706 (Dual Element Coaxial or 3.6.11.2 Supply Voltage.......................................80
Twin Flexible probe)..............................53 3.7 Model Numbers......................................................81
3.3.5.2 Model 706 (Single Rod Probe) ..............54 3.7.1 Transmitter...................................................81
3.4 Configuration Information .....................................56 3.7.2 Enlarged Coaxial Probe ................................82
3.4.1 Level Offset Description...............................56 3.7.3 Small Coaxial Probe .....................................84
3.4.2 End-of-Probe Analysis ..................................57 3.7.4 Caged Probe.................................................86
3.4.3 Echo Rejection .............................................58 3.7.5 Single Rod Rigid Probe ................................88
3.4.4 Volumetric Capability ..................................58 3.7.6 Single Cable Flexible Probe ..........................90
3.4.4.1 Configuration using built-in 3.7.7 Twin Cable Flexible Probe............................92
vessel types ............................................58 3.7.8 Segmented Probe Options............................94
3.4.4.2 Configuration using Custom Table........60 3.8 Parts ........................................................................95
3.4.5 Open Channel Flow Capability....................61 3.8.1 Replacement Parts ........................................95
3.4.5.1 Configuration using Flume/Weir 4.0 Advanced Configuration/Troubleshooting Techniques
Equations ..............................................62 4.1 End-of-Probe Analysis (EOPA) ................................97
3.4.5.2 Configuration using Generic 4.1.1 Enable EOPA using PACTware .....................97
Equation................................................63 4.1.2 Enable EOPA using keyboard/LCD...............98
3.4.5.3 Configuration using Generic 4.2 Sloped Threshold .....................................................99
Equation................................................64 4.3 Echo Rejection .......................................................101
3.4.6 Reset Function .............................................65 4.4 Buildup Detection..................................................104
3.4.7 Additional Diagnostic/Troubleshooting 4.4.1 Buildup Detection Setup
Capabilities ................................................65 using PACTware ........................................105
3.4.7.1 Event History ........................................65 4.4.2 Buildup Detection Setup
3.4.7.2 Context-sensitive Help ..........................65 using the Keypad........................................106
3.4.7.3 Trend Data ............................................65
3.5 Agency Approvals....................................................66
3.5.1 Agency Specifications
(Special Conditions for use) .........................67
3.5.2 Agency Specifications (XP Installation) ........67
3.5.3 Agency Specifications (IS Installation)..........68
3.5.4 Agency Specifications
(IS, FOUNDATION™ fieldbus Installation) ......69
3.6 Specifications ..........................................................70
3.6.1 Functional/Physical ......................................70
3.6.2 O-ring (Seal) Selection Chart .......................72
3.6.3 Probe Selection Guide ..................................73
3.6.4 Probe Specifications......................................74
3.6.5 Physical Specifications — Transmitter ..........75
3.6.6 Physical Specifications — Coaxial Probes.....76
3.6.7 Physical Specifications — Caged Probes.......77
3.6.8 Physical Specifications —
Single Rod Flexible Probes ...........................78

4 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


1.0 QuickStart Installation
The QuickStart Installation procedures provide an overview
of the key steps required for mounting, wiring, and config-
uring the ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar level
transmitter. These procedures are intended for more experi-
enced installers of ECLIPSE transmitters (or other electron-
ic level measurement instruments).
Section 2.0, Complete Installation, offers more detailed
installation instructions for the first time user.
WARNING: Overfill-capable probes such as the Model 7yD, 7yG,
7yJ, 7yL, 7yP, or 7yT should be used for all Safety
Shutdown/Overfill applications.

The Model 706 transmitter, when used with an overfill


coaxial or caged probe, is capable of measuring true
liquid level all the way up to the face of the flange or NPT
connection. This is a very unique advantage as com-
pared to other Guided Wave Radar (GWR) devices that
may infer level at the top of the probe when signals are
lost or uncertain. Refer to Section 3.2.6 for additional
information on overfill capability.

Depending on the probe type, all other ECLIPSE probes


should be installed so the maximum overfill level is a
minimum of 6"-12" (150–300 mm) below the flange or
NPT connection. This may include utilizing a nozzle or
spool piece to raise the probe. Consult factory to ensure
proper installation and operation.

1.1 Getting Started

Have the proper equipment, tools, and information


available before beginning the QuickStart Installation
procedures.

1.1.1 Equipment and Tools


• Open-end wrenches (or adjustable wrench) to fit the process
connection size and type.
• Coaxial probe: 11⁄2" (38 mm)
• Twin cable probe: 17⁄8" (47 mm)
• Single rod probe: 17⁄8" (47 mm)
• Transmitter 11⁄2" (38 mm).
• A torque wrench is highly desirable.
• Flat-blade screwdriver
• Cable cutter and 3⁄32" hex wrench (for flexible cable probes
only)
• Digital multimeter or digital volt/ammeter
• 24 VDC power supply, 23 mA minimum
57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 5
1.1.2 Configuration Information
To utilize the QuickStart menu available on the
ECLIPSE Model 706, some key information is required
for configuration.
Gather the information and complete the following operating
parameters table before beginning configuration.

NOTES: The QuickStart menu is available for Level Only applications.


1. Refer to Section 2.6.5 for configuration menus for Interface,
Volume or Flow applications.
2. These configuration steps are not necessary if the transmitter
was pre-configured prior to shipment.
Display Question Answer

Level Units What units of measurement will be used?


(inches, millimeters, centimeters, feet
or meters) _____________
Probe Model What probe model is listed on the
model information?
(first three digits of probe model number) _____________
Probe Mount Is the probe mounted NPT, BSP,
or flange? (Refer to probe model.) _____________
Probe Length What probe length is listed on the
probe model information? (last three
digits of the probe model number) _____________
Level Offset The desired level reading when the
liquid is at the tip of the probe. (Refer
to Section 3.4 for more information.) _____________
Dielectric Range What is the dielectric constant range
of the process medium? _____________
4.0 mA What is the 0% reference point for the
Set Point 4.0 mA value? _____________
(Does not apply for FounDation fieldbus™ or PRoFiBuS Pa)

20.0 mA What is the 100% reference point for


Set Point the 20.0 mA value?
(Ensure that this value is outside of the
Blocking Distance when utilizing non-
overfill-capable probes.) _____________
(Does not apply for FounDation fieldbus™ or PRoFiBuS Pa)

Failure Alarm What output current is desired when


a Failure Indicator is present? _____________
(Does not apply for FounDation fieldbus™ or PRoFiBuS Pa)

1.2 QuickStart Mounting

Ensure that the configuration style and process connection


size/type of the ECLIPSE transmitter and probe matches
the requirements of the installation before continuing with
the QuickStart installation.

6 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


For optimal performance (and correlation to the Calibration
Certificate included with all units), confirm the model and
serial numbers shown on the nameplates of the ECLIPSE
probe and transmitter are identical.
NOTES: For applications using the Model 7yS Steam Probe, it is
mandatory to keep the transmitter and probe matched as a set.
(Refer to Section 3.2.5 for additional information regarding sat-
urated steam applications.)
To avoid moisture ingress in the housing, covers should be fully
tightened at all times. For same reason, conduit entries should
be properly sealed.
1.2.1 Probe
1. Carefully place the probe into the vessel. Align the probe
process connection with the threaded or flanged mounting
on the vessel.
2. Tighten the hex nut of the probe process connection or
flange bolts.
NOTES: Leave the plastic protective cap in place on the probe until you
are ready to install the transmitter. Do not use sealing com-
pound or TFE tape on probe connection to transmitter as this
connection is sealed with a Viton® o-ring.
If using a segmented probe or removable rod, ensure that all
pieces are assembled and connected before installation.
√ ƒ 1.2.2 Transmitter
3. Remove the protective plastic cap from the top of the probe
and store for future use. Make sure the top probe connector
¬ ≈ (male connection) is clean and dry. Clean with isopropyl
alcohol and cotton swabs if necessary.
4. Carefully place the transmitter onto the probe. Align the
¡
universal connection at the base of the transmitter housing
with the top of the probe. Only hand-tighten the connec-
¿ tion at this point in time.
5. Rotate the transmitter so that it is in the most convenient
position for wiring, configuring and viewing.
6. Using a 11⁄2" (38 mm) wrench, tighten the universal connec-
tion on the transmitter 1⁄4 to 1⁄2 turn beyond hand-tight. As
this is a critical connection, a torque wrench is highly
recommended to obtain 45 ft-lbs (60 Nm).
DO NOT LEAVE HAND-TIGHT.
NOTE: The ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter can be supplied with a
universal connector containing lock screws for applications
with significant vibration. Contact the factory for additional
information.
57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 7
1.3 QuickStart Wiring

WARNING! Possible explosion hazard. Do not connect or discon-


nect equipment unless power has been switched off and
the area is known to be non-hazardous.

Black (-) Red (+) NOTE: Ensure that the electrical wiring to the ECLIPSE Model 706
transmitter is complete and in compliance with all local regula-
tions and codes.
(+)
(-) 1. Remove the cover of the upper wiring compartment of the
Model 706 transmitter.
2. Attach a conduit fitting and mount the conduit plug in the
spare opening. Pull the power supply wire through the con-
duit fitting.
3. If present, connect cable shield to an earth ground at the
power supply.
4. Connect an earth ground to the nearest green ground screw.
(Not shown in illustration.)
5. Connect the positive supply wire to the (+) terminal and the
negative supply wire to the (-) terminal. For Explosion
Proof Installations, see Wiring, Section 2.5.3.
6. Replace and tighten the cover.

1.4 QuickStart Configuration

If requested, the ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter is


shipped fully pre-configured for the application and can be
installed immediately. Otherwise it is shipped configured
with default values from the factory and can be easily
reconfigured in the shop.
Up Down Back Enter The minimum configuration instructions required for using
the QuickStart menu follow. Use the information from the
operating parameters table in Section 1.1.2 before proceeding
In or Cm
with the configuration.
Probe Mount

The QuickStart menu offers a very simple two screen


20 mA
(100% Point)
overview showing the basic parameters required for typical
“Level Only” operation.
Probe Model 1. Apply power to the transmitter.
Probe Length

Dielectric
The graphic LCD display can be programmed to change
of Medium every 2 seconds to show pertinent Measured Values on the
Home Screen. For example: Level, %Output, and Loop
4 mA Level
(0%-point) current can all be displayed on a rotating screen.
Level Offset
The LCD can also be programmed to always show just one
of the Measured Variables at all times. For example: Level
NOTE: A small transition zone (0–12") can be the only value displayed on the screen.
(0-300 mm) may exist at the top
and bottom of certain probes. 2. Remove the lower electronic compartment cover.

8 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3. The push buttons offer multiple forms of functionality for
menu navigation and data entry. (See Section 2.6 for com-
STEP 4 plete explanation).


UP moves up through the menu or increases a displayed
value.


DOWN moves down through the menu or decreases a
displayed value.

BACK exits a branch of the menu or exits without
accepting entered value.
➪ ENTER enters a branch of the menu or accepts a
displayed entry.

NOTE: Holding down ENTER when any menu or parameter is high-


lighted will show help text in reference to that item.
Up Down Back Enter
The default User Password = 0. (If a password is requested,
enter it at that time.)
STEP 5 The following configuration entries are the minimum
required for a QuickStart configuration. Refer to figures at
left.
4. Press any key at the Home Screen to access the Main Menu.
5. Press ➪ ENTER with the DEVICE SETUP menu item
highlighted.
6. Press ➪ ENTER with the QUICKSTART menu item
highlighted.
The QuickStart shows the basic parameters, with the
present value of the highlighted parameter shown at the
bottom of the screen.
One can now quickly and easily scroll through the
QuickStart configuration items, changing those parameters
as required:
STEP 6
• Scroll to the parameter to be changed.
• Press ➪ ENTER at the highlighted parameter.
• Scroll to the desired option, then press ➪ ENTER.

• Scroll to next parameter or press BACK when
finished to exit the QuickStart menu.
Section 1.4.1 lists and describes the nine parameters in the
QuickStart menu.
7. After making all of the necessary changes in the QuickStart
menu, press the BACK button three times to return to the
Home Screen.
8. The QuickStart configuration is complete. If properly con-
figured, the Model 706 transmitter is measuring level and is
ready for service.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 9


1.4.1 QuickStart Menu Options
Level Units Select the Units of measurement for the level readout:
• Inches • Feet • Millimeters • Centimeters • Meters
Probe Model Select the Probe Model to be used with Model 706:
(NOTE: All Probe Models may not be available depending on the firmware version.)
• 7YD Coaxial High Temperature High Pressure
• 7YF Single Rod for installation onto tanks
• 7YG Single Rod for installation into cages
• 7YH Single Hygienic (Future)
• 7YJ Single High Temperature High Pressure for cages
• 7YL Single Rod High Pressure for cages
• 7YM Single Rod High Pressure for tanks
• 7YN Single Rod High Temperature High Pressure for tanks
• 7YP Coaxial High Pressure
• 7YS Coaxial Steam
• 7YT Coaxial Standard
• 7YV Coax High Vibration (Future)
• 7Y1 Single Flexible Standard
• 7Y2 Single Flexible Bulk Solids
• 7Y3 Single Flexible Standard High Temperature High Pressure
• 7Y5 Twin Flexible Bulk Solids
• 7Y6 Single Flexible High Temperature High Pressure for Cages
• 7Y7 Twin Flexible with FEP Coating

Probe Mount Select the type of Probe Mounting to the vessel:


(NOTE: All Probe Mount options may not be available depending on the firmware version).
• NPT (National Pipe Thread)
• BSP (British Standard Pipe)
• Flange (ASME or DIN)
• NPT with Flushing Connection
• BSP with Flushing Connection
• Flange with Flushing Connection
• Hygienic

Probe Length Enter the exact Probe Length as printed on the probe nameplate. Probe Length is shown
as the last three digits of the Probe Model number. Range is 12 inches to 100 feet (30 cm
to 30 meters) probe dependent. Refer to Section 1.4.1.1.
Level Offset Enter the desired level reading when the liquid is at the end of the probe. Range is -25 feet
to 75 feet (-762 cm to 22 meters). Refer to Section 3.4 for further information. (With default
Level Offset = 0, all measurements are referenced from the bottom of the probe.)

Dielectric Range Enter the Dielectric Range for the material to be measured.
Below 1.7 (Light Hydrocarbons like Propane and Butane)
1.7 to 3.0 (Most typical hydrocarbons)
3.0 to 10 (Varying dielectric, for example: mixing tanks)
Above 10 (Water-based media)

4 mA Set Point Enter the level value (0%-point) for the 4 mA point. Lower Range Value (LRV).
(LRV) Refer to Section 1.4.1.1.
20 mA Set Point Enter the level value (100%-point) for the 20 mA point. Upper Range Value (URV).
HART Only

(URV) Refer to Section 1.4.1.1.


Failure Alarm Enter the desired output state when a Failure Indicator is active.
• 22 mA
• 3.6 mA
• Hold (Hold last value is not recommended)

10 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


1.4.1.1 QuickStart Numerical Data Entry
To make numerical entry changes to Probe Length and
Level Offset:


UP moves up to the next highest digit (0,1,2,3,....,9 or
the decimal point).
If held down the digits scroll until the push button is
released.


DOWN moves up to the next lowest digit (0,1,2,3,....,9
or the decimal point). If held down the digits scroll until
the push button is released.

BACK moves the cursor to the left and deletes a digit.
If the cursor is already at the leftmost position, then the
screen is exited without changing the previously saved
value.
➪ ENTER Moves the cursor to the right. If the cursor is
located at a blank character position, the new value is
saved.
Scrolling further DOWN in the QuickStart menu results in
the remaining parameters appearing one by one, with the
present highlighted value shown at the bottom of the
screen.

BACK returns to the previous menu without changing
the original value, which is immediately redisplayed.
➪ ENTER accepts the displayed value and returns to the
previous menu.
Negative values can be entered by highlighting the “+” sign
shown prior to the number, then pressing UP to change it
to show “-”.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 11


2.0 Complete Installation
This section provides detailed procedures for properly
installing, wiring, and configuring the ECLIPSE Model 706
Guided Wave Radar Level Transmitter.

2.1 Unpacking

Unpack the instrument carefully. Make sure all components


have been removed from the packing material. Check all the
contents against the packing slip and report any discrepan-
cies to the factory.
Before proceeding with the installation, do the following:
• Inspect all components for damage. Report any damage to
the carrier within 24 hours.
• Make sure the nameplate model number on the probe and
transmitter agree with the packing slip and purchase order.
• Record the model and serial numbers for future reference
when ordering parts.

Model Number

Serial Number

For optimal performance (and correlation to the Calibration


Certificate included with all units), confirm the model and
serial numbers shown on the nameplates of the ECLIPSE
probe and transmitter are identical.
NOTES: For applications using the Model 7yS Steam Probe, it is
mandatory to keep the transmitter and probe matched as a set.
(Refer to section 3.2.5 for additional information regarding sat-
urated steam applications.)
To avoid moisture ingress in the housing, covers should be fully
tightened at all times. For same reason, conduit entries should
be properly sealed.

2.2 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)


Handling Procedure

MAGNETROL electronic instruments are manufactured to


the highest quality standards. These instruments use elec-
tronic components that may be damaged by static electricity
present in most work environments.
The following steps are recommended to reduce the risk of
component failure due to electrostatic discharge.
• Ship and store circuit boards in anti-static bags. If an anti-
static bag is not available, wrap the board in aluminum
foil. Do not place boards on foam packing materials.

12 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


• Use a grounding wrist strap when installing and removing
circuit boards. A grounded workstation is recommended.
• Handle circuit boards only by the edges. Do not touch
components or connector pins.
• Make sure that all electrical connections are completely
made and none are partial or floating. Ground all equip-
ment to a good, earth ground.

2.3 Before You Begin

2.3.1 Site Preparation


Each ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter/probe is built to
match the physical specifications of the required installa-
tion. Ensure that the probe process connection is correct for
the threaded or flanged mounting on the vessel where the
transmitter will be placed. See Mounting, Section 2.4.
Ensure that all local, state, and federal regulations and
guidelines are observed. See Wiring, Section 2.5.
Ensure that the wiring between the power supply and
ECLIPSE transmitter is complete and correct for the type
of installation. See Specifications, Section 3.6.

2.3.2 Equipment and Tools


No special equipment or tools are required to install the
ECLIPSE transmitter. The following items are recommended:
• Open-end wrenches (or adjustable wrench) to fit the process
connection size and type.
• Coaxial probe: 11⁄2" (38 mm)
• Twin cable probe: 17⁄8" (47 mm)
• Single Rod probe: 17⁄8" (47 mm)
• Transmitter 11⁄2" (38 mm)
A torque wrench is highly desirable.
• Flat-blade screwdriver
• Cable cutter and 3⁄32" hex wrench (for flexible cable probes
only)
• Digital multimeter or digital volt/ammeter
• 24 VDC power supply, 23 mA minimum

2.3.3 Operational Considerations


Operating specifications vary based on probe model
number. See Specifications, Section 3.6.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 13


2.4 Mounting
An ECLIPSE Model 706 GWR probe can be mounted on
to a tank using a variety of process connections. Generally,
either a threaded or flanged connection is used. For infor-
mation about the sizes and types of connections available,
see Probe Model Numbers, Section 3.7.2.
NOTE: Do not place insulating material around any part of the ECLIPSE
Model 706 transmitter as this may cause excessive heat buildup.
The figure at left shows an example of properly installed insula-
tion. Insulation is critical in high temperature applications where
Do Not Insulate condensation can occur at the top of the probe.
Above This Point

Insulation
Ensure that all mounting connections are properly in place
Region on the tank before installing the probe.
7" (175 mm)
Mounting
Flange Compare the nameplate on the probe and transmitter with
the product information to confirm that the ECLIPSE
probe is correct for the intended installation.

Model 7yS Probe WARNING! Overfill-capable probes such as the Model 7yD, 7yG,
7yJ, 7yL, 7yP, or 7yT should be used for all Safety
Shutdown/Overfill applications.
The Model 706 transmitter, when used with an overfill
coaxial or caged probe, is capable of measuring true
liquid level to within specification all the way up to the
face of the flange or NPT connection. This is a very
unique advantage as compared to other Guided Wave
Radar (GWR) devices that may infer level at the top of the
probe when signals are lost or uncertain. Refer to Section
3.2.6 for additional information on overfill capability.
All other ECLIPSE probes should be installed so the
maximum overfill level is a minimum of 6" (150 mm)
below the flange or NPT connection. This may include
utilizing a nozzle or spool piece to raise the probe.
Remove transport screws Consult factory to ensure proper installation and operation.
and/or cable ties, if applicable
WARNING! Do not disassemble probe when in service and under
pressure.

NOTE: Models 7yD, 7yJ, 7yL, 7yM, 7yN, 7yP and 7yS High
Temperature/High Pressure probes (containing a glass ceramic
alloy process seal) should be handled with extra care. Only
handle these probes by the flanges or NPT connections.
Remove transport hardware as shown at left.

2.4.1 Installing a Coaxial Probe


(Models 7yD, 7yP, 7yS, and 7yT)
Before installing, ensure that:
• The model and serial numbers shown on the nameplates of
the ECLIPSE probe and transmitter are identical. For opti-
mal performance (and correlation to the Calibration
Certificate included with all units), transmitters and probes
should be installed as a matched set.
14 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter
NOTE: For applications using the Model 7yS Steam Probe, it is
mandatory to keep the transmitter and probe matched as a
set. Refer to Section 3.2.5 for additional information regarding
saturated steam applications.
• Probe has adequate room for installation and has unob-
① ④ structed entry to the bottom of the vessel.
② • Process temperature, pressure, dielectric, and viscosity are

within the probe specifications for the installation. See
Specifications, Section 3.6.

2.4.1.1 To install a coaxial probe:


1. Ensure that the process connection is the correct threaded
or flanged mounting.
2. Carefully place the probe into the vessel. Properly align the
gasket on flanged installations.
3. Align the probe process connection with the threaded or
flanged mounting on the vessel.
4. For threaded connections, tighten the hex nut of the probe
process connection. For flanged connections, tighten flange
bolts.

NOTE: If the transmitter is to be installed at a later time, do not remove


the protective cap from the probe.

NOTE: Do not use sealing compound or TFE tape on probe connec-


tion to transmitter as this connection is sealed by a Viton®
o-ring.

2.4.2 Installing a Segmented Coaxial Probe


1. 2. 1. Use the large installation plate with the 1.88" slot (provided
with the order) to hold the lower section of the outer tube.
Using two 2" wrenches, tighten couplings. Threads will be
self-locking.
Repeat for the second outer tube section.
2. Use the smaller installation plate to hold the lower section
of the extension shaft, resting one of the spacers on the
plate. Using two 1⁄2" wrenches, tighten extension shaft
coupling. Secure with set screws.
Repeat for the second extension shaft section.
3. 4.
3. Using two 1⁄2" wrenches, attach the middle extension shaft
segment to the top segment (built into the probe head).
The flange gasket should be in place before assembling this
joint. It may be taped to the probe flange to hold it out of
the way.
4. Remove the smaller installation plate from the extension
shaft and assemble the middle outer tube segment to the
coupling on the probe head. Remove the large installation
plate, and assemble the flanges.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 15


2.4.3 Installing a Caged Probe
Models 7yG, 7yL and 7yJ
Before installing, ensure that the:
• The model and serial numbers shown on the nameplates of
the ECLIPSE probe and transmitter are identical. For opti-
mal performance (and correlation to the Calibration
Certificate included with all units), transmitters and probes
should be installed as a matched set.
• Probe has adequate room for installation and has unob-
structed entry to the bottom of the vessel.
• Process temperature, pressure, dielectric, and viscosity are
within the probe specifications for the installation. See
Specifications, Section 3.6.

NOTES: Model 7yL and 7yJ probes (High Pressure/High Temperature


probes (containing a glass ceramic alloy process seal) should
be handled with extra care. Only handle these probes by the
flanges or NPT connection. Do not lift probes by the shaft.
If using a segmented caged probe, ensure that all pieces are
assembled and connected before installation.

2.4.3.1 To install a caged probe:


1. Ensure that the process connection is the correct flanged
mounting.
2. Carefully place the probe into the vessel. Properly align the
gasket on flanged installations.

NOTE: A metallic gasket must be used to ensure an adequate


electrical connection between the probe flange and the cage
(chamber). This connection is critical to obtain true overfill
performance.
3. Align the probe process connection flanged mounting on
the cage.
4. Tighten flange bolts.

NOTES: If the transmitter is to be installed at a later time, do not remove


the protective cap from the probe.
Do not use sealing compound or TFE tape on probe connec-
tion to transmitter as this connection is sealed by a Viton®
o-ring.

16 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


2.4.4 Installing a Single Rod Probe
Rigid Models 7yF, 7yG, 7yJ, 7yL, 7yM and 7yN
Flexible Models 7y1, 7y2, 7y3 and 7y6
Before installing, ensure that the:
• The model and serial numbers shown on the nameplates of
the ECLIPSE probe and transmitter are identical. For opti-
mal performance (and correlation to the Calibration
Certificate included with all units), transmitters and probes
should be installed as a matched set.
• Probe has adequate room for installation and has unob-
structed entry to the bottom of the vessel.
• Process temperature, pressure, dielectric, and viscosity are
within the probe specifications for the installation. See
Specifications, Section 3.6.
For standard Non-Overfill-Capable Single Rod probes
B installed directly into a vessel:
A

NOTE: If using a removable rod, ensure that all pieces are assembled
and connected before installation.
1. Ensure that the nozzle does not restrict performance by
ensuring the following:
• Nozzle is > 2" (50mm) diameter.
• Ratio of Diameter: Length (A:B) is 1:1 or greater; any ratio
<1:1 (e.g., a 2"¥ 6" nozzle = 1:3) may require a Blocking
Distance and/or DIELECTRIC RANGE adjustment.
2. No pipe reducers (restrictions) are used.
3. Probe is kept away from conductive objects to ensure proper
performance.
• See Probe Clearance Table below. A lower gain (increase in
DIELECTRIC RANGE setting) may be necessary to ignore
certain objects
• This table is only a recommendation. These distances can
be improved by optimizing the transmitter configuration
with PACTware™.
Distance
Acceptable Objects
to Probe
Continuous, smooth, parallel conductive sur-
<6" (15 cm) face, for example a metal tank wall; important
that probe does not touch wall
<1" (25 mm) diameter pipe and beams,
>6" (15 cm)
ladder rungs
<3" (75 mm) diameter pipe and beams,
>12" (30 cm)
concrete walls

>18" (46 cm) All remaining objects

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 17


2.4.4.1 To install a rigid single rod probe:
1. Ensure that the process connection is at least 1" NPT or a
flanged mounting.
2. Carefully place the probe into the vessel. Align the gasket
on flanged installations.
➀ ➃
➁ ➂ 3. Align the probe process connection with the threaded or
flanged mounting on the vessel.
4. For threaded connections, tighten the hex nut of the probe
process connection. For flanged connections, tighten flange
bolts.
5. When mounted directly into vessels, the probe can be stabi-
lized by placing the tip of the probe into a non-metallic cup
or bracket at the bottom of the probe.

A bottom spacer option is offered for mounting into a
metallic cup or bracket or for centering within a pipe/cham-
ber. Refer to Replacement Parts, Section 3.8 for additional
information.

NOTE: If the transmitter is to be installed at a later time, do not remove


➀ ➃ the protective cap from the probe. Do not use sealing com-
➁ ➂ pound or TFE tape on probe connection to transmitter as this
connection is sealed by a Viton® O-ring.

2.4.4.2 To install a flexible single rod probe for liquids:


1. Make sure the process connection is at least 1" NPT or a
flanged mounting.
2. Carefully place the probe into the vessel. Align the gasket
on flanged installations.
3. Align the probe process connection with the threaded or
➅ flanged mounting on the vessel.
4. For threaded connections, tighten the hex nut of the probe
process connection. For flanged connections, tighten flange
➄ bolts.
5. Probe can be shortened in field:
1
a. Raise TFE weight (1) exposing securing device (2).
0.50" (13 mm) Ø
b. Loosen both #10–32 set screws (3) using 3⁄32" hex wrench
and remove securing device.
c. Cut and remove needed cable (4) length.
d. Reattach securing device and tighten screws.
e. Enter new probe length (in the appropriate units) into
2 the transmitter.
3
6. Probe can be attached to the tank bottom using the 0.50"
4 (13 mm) hole provided in the TFE weight. Cable tension
should not exceed 50 lbs (23 Kgs).

18 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


2.4.4.3 To install a flexible single rod probe for solids:
The Model 7y2 Single Flexible Bulk Solids probe is
designed for a 3000 lb. (1360 kg) pull-down force for use in
applications such as sand, plastic pellets and grains. It is
offered with a maximum 100 foot (30.5 meter) probe
length.
Model 7y2 Single Rod — dielectric ≥4 probe length depen-
dent.
Applications
• Salts: Dielectric constant 4.0–7.0
• Metallic powder, coal dust: Dielectric constant >7

NOTE: Contact the factory for those applications requiring additional


pull down forces such as cement, heavy gravel, etc.
Mounting recommendations
• To reduce forces, utilize the standard 5 lb. (2.3 kg) weight
at the bottom of the probe instead of securing the probe to
the vessel.
• Mount the probe at least 12 inches (30 cm) from the wall.
Ideal location is 1⁄4 to 1⁄6 the diameter to average the angle of
repose.
• A metal flange must be used when mounting on plastic
vessels.
1. Ensure the process connection is at least 2" NPT or a
flanged mounting.
2. Carefully place the probe into the vessel. Align the gasket
on flanged installations.
3. Align the probe process connection with the threaded or
flanged mounting on the vessel.
4. For threaded connections, tighten the hex nut of the probe
process connection. For flanged connections, tighten flange
bolts.
5. Probe can be shortened in field:
6. a. Loosen and remove the two cable clamps.
Probe
Length b. Slide the weight off of the probe.
c. Cut the cable to the required length plus 6.5 inches
(165 mm).
d. Slide the weight back on to the probe.
3" ± 1"
(75 mm ± 25 mm) e. Reinstall the two cable clamps and tighten.
f. Enter the new probe length (in the appropriate level
units) into the transmitter.
Model 7y2 Single Rod
Bulk Solids Probe

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 19


2.4.5 Installing a Twin Flexible Probe
➀ ➃➄
➁ ➂ (Models 7y5 and 7y7)
Before installing, ensure that the:
• The model and serial numbers shown on the nameplates of
the ECLIPSE probe and transmitter are identical. For opti-
mal performance (and correlation to the Calibration
Certificate included with all units), transmitters and probes
should be installed as a matched set.
• Probe has adequate room for installation and has unob-
➅ structed entry to the bottom of the vessel.
• Process temperature, pressure, dielectric, and viscosity are
within the probe specifications for the installation. See
Specifications, Section 3.6.

Nozzles:
1
The 7y5 and 7y7 Twin Flexible probes may be susceptible
0.50" (13 mm) Ø to objects that are in close proximity. The following rules
should be followed for proper application:
1. Nozzles should be 3" (DN80) diameter or larger.
2. Twin Rod flexible probes should be installed such that the
active cable is >1" (25 mm) from metallic objects such as
pipes, ladders, etc.
3 (A bare tank wall parallel to the probe is acceptable).
2 4
2.4.5.1 To install a Model 7y7 standard flexible twin rod
probe:
1. Ensure that the process connection is the correct threaded
or flanged mounting.
Active Rod
2. Ensure that there is at least 1" (25 mm) spacing between
the active probe rod and any part of the tank (walls, still-
Twin Cable Probe well, pipes, support beams, mixer blades, etc.)
end view
The minimum stillwell diameter for Twin Flexible probe
is 3" (DN80).

NOTE: Optional spacers are available to keep the cable centered


within the stillwell. Contact factory for details.

Pipe ∅ Pipe Sch. Male P/N Female P/N

3-inch 40 004-0720-001 004-0719-001

4-inch 40 004-0720-002 004-0719-002

3-inch 80 004-0720-003 004-0719-003

Twin Flexible Probe 4-inch 80 004-0720-004 004-0719-004


with Optional Spacer

20 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3. Carefully place the probe into the vessel. Properly align the
gasket on flanged installations.
4. Align the probe process connection with the threaded or
➅ flanged mounting on the vessel.
1 5. For threaded connections, tighten the hex nut of the probe
process connection. For flanged connections, tighten flange
0.50" (13 mm) Ø bolts.
Model 7y7 Twin Flexible probes contain a TFE weight at
the bottom. This TFE weight has a 0.5" (13mm) hole in it
that can be used to “u-bolt” to the bottom of the vessel or
hang additional weight (up to 100 lbs. [45 Kg.]) to it. This
may be necessary in turbulent applications to limit move-
ment of the probe within the vessel.
3
2 Twin Flexible Probes can be shortened in the field:
4
6. a. Raise the Teflon TFE weight (1) to expose the two secur-
ing devices (2).
b. Loosen the two #10-32 set screws (3) on both securing
devices using a 3⁄32" hex wrench and slide the securing
devices off of the probe.
c. Slide the TFE weight off of the probe.
d. Cut and remove the required cable (4) length.
e. Remove 31⁄2" (90 mm) of the rib between the two cables.
f. Strip 5⁄8" (16 mm) of coating from the two cables.
g. Slide the TFE weight back on to the probe.
h. Re-attach the securing device and tighten screws.
i. Enter new probe length (in the appropriate Level Units)
into the transmitter.

NOTES:
1) If the transmitter is to be installed at a later time, do not
remove the protective cap from the probe.
2) Do not use sealing compound or TFE tape on probe con-
nection to transmitter as this connection is sealed by a
Viton® O-ring.

2.4.5.2 To install a Model 7Y5 bulk solids flexible twin rod


probe:
The Model 7Y5 bulk solids probe is designed for a 3000 lb.
(1360 kg) pull-down force for use in applications such as
sand, plastic pellets and grains. It is offered with a maxi-
mum 100-foot (30-meter) probe length.
Model 7Y5 Twin Rod — dielectric ≥ 1.8 probe length
dependent.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 21


Applications
1. Plastic pellets, sugar: Dielectric constant 1.9–2.0
2. Grain, seeds, sand: Dielectric constant 2.0–3.0
3. Salts: Dielectric constant 4.0–7.0
4. Metallic powder, coal dust: Dielectric constant >7

NOTE: Contact the factory for those applications requiring addition


pull down forces such as cement, heavy gravel, etc.
Probe
Length
Mounting recommendations
• To reduce forces, utilize the standard 5 lb. (2.3 kg) stainless
steel weight at the bottom of the probe instead of securing
the probe to the vessel.
3" ± 1" • Mount the probe at least 12 inches from the wall. Ideal
(75 mm ± 25 mm)
location is 1⁄4 to 1⁄6 the diameter to average the angle of
repose.
• A metal flange must be used when mounting on plastic
vessels.
Model 7y5 Dual Rod
Bulk Solids Probe
1. Ensure that the process connection is the correct threaded
or flanged mounting.
2. Make sure that there is at least 1" (25 mm) spacing between
the active cable and any part of the tank (walls, stillwell,
pipes, support beams, mixer blades, etc.)
3. Carefully place the probe into the vessel. Properly align the
gasket on flanged installations.
4. Align the probe process connection with the threaded or
flanged mounting on the vessel.
5. For threaded connections, tighten the hex nut of the probe
process connection. For flanged connections, tighten flange
bolts.
Bulk Solids Twin Flexible probes can be shortened in the field:
6. a. Loosen and remove the two cable clamps.
b. Slide the weight off of the probe.
c. Cut the cable to the required length.
d. Remove 12 inches (30 cm) of the rib between the two
cables.
e. Strip 9 inches (23 cm) of coating from the two cables.
f. Slide the weight back on to the probe so that there is 8.5
inches (21 cm) from top of weight to the end of the
cables.
g. Reinstall the two cable clamps and tighten.
h. Enter new probe length (in the appropriate Level Units)
into the transmitter.

22 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


2.4.6 Installing the ECLIPSE Model 706 Transmitter
The transmitter can be ordered for installation in three con-
figurations;
1) As an Integral version, mounted directly on to the probe.
2) As a Remote version, with the transmitter separated from
the probe by a distance of 3 feet (84 cm).
3) As a Remote version, with the transmitter separated from
the probe by a distance of 12 feet (366 cm).

NOTE Due to their extra weight, remote mounted transmitter Model


Number 706-5xxx-x2x is recommended for:
• All applications utilizing the cast 316 SS enclosure
• Those applications having potential vibration

2.4.6.1 Integral Mount


1. Remove the protective plastic cap from the top of the
probe. Store the cap in a safe place in case the transmitter
has to be removed later.
2. Place the transmitter on the probe. Do not allow the gold
¡
pin in the high frequency connector or the gold socket on
√ the probe to get dirty.

¿
3. Align the universal connection at the base of the transmitter
housing with the top of the probe. Only hand-tighten the
ƒ connection at this time.
¬ 4. Rotate the transmitter to face the most convenient direction
for wiring, configuration, and viewing.
5. When the transmitter is facing the desired direction, use a
11⁄2" wrench to tighten the universal connection on the
transmitter to 45 ft-lbs (60 Nm). A torque wrench is highly
recommended. This is a critical connection. DO NOT
LEAVE HAND-TIGHT.

2.4.6.2 Remote Mount


1. Mount the transmitter/remote bracket as an assembly within
33" or 144" (84 or 366 cm) of the probe. DO NOT
REMOVE TRANSMITTER OR REMOTE CABLE
FROM THE MOUNTING BRACKET.
2. Remove the protective plastic cap from the top of the
probe. Store the cap in a safe place in case the transmitter
has to be removed later.
3. Align the universal connection at the end of the remote
assembly with the top of the probe. Using a 11⁄2" wrench,
tighten the universal connection on the transmitter to 45 ft-
lbs (60 Nm). A torque wrench is highly recommended. This
is a critical connection. DO NOT LEAVE HAND-TIGHT.
U-bolts not included

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 23


2.5 Wiring
Caution: HART versions of the ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter
operate at voltages of 11–36 VDC, FOUNDATION fieldbus
versions operate at 9–17.5 VDC, and Modbus versions
operate at 8–30 VDC. Higher voltages will damage the
transmitter.
Wiring connections between the power supply and the
ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter should be made using
18–22 AWG shielded twisted pair instrument cable.
Connections are made to the terminal strip and the
ground connections within the top enclosure compartment.
The directions for wiring the ECLIPSE transmitter depend
on the application:
• General Purpose or Non-Incendive (Cl I, Div. 2)
• Intrinsically Safe
• Explosion Proof
WARNING! Explosion hazard. Do not disconnect equipment unless
power has been switched off or the area is known to be
non-hazardous.

2.5.1 General Purpose or Non-Incendive (Cl I, Div. 2)


A general purpose installation does not have flammable
media present.
Areas rated Non-Incendive (Cl I, Div. 2) have flammable
Black (-) Red (+) media present only under abnormal conditions.
No special electrical connections are required.
(+)
(-)
Caution: If flammable media is contained in the vessel, the trans-
mitter must be installed per Class I, Div 1 standards of
area classification.
To install General Purpose or Non-Incendive wiring:
1. Remove the cover from the wiring compartment of the
transmitter. Install the conduit plug in the unused opening
and use PTFE tape/sealant to ensure a liquid-tight connec-
tion.
2. Install a conduit fitting and pull the supply wires.
Wiring Diagram 3. Connect shield to an earth ground at power supply.
4. Connect an earth ground wire to the nearest green ground
screw (not shown in illustration).
5. Connect the positive supply wire to the (+) terminal and
the negative supply wire to the (-) terminal. (The recom-
mended torque on terminal block screws is 7–10 in-lbs.)
6. Replace and tighten the cover to the transmitter wiring
compartment before applying power.

24 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


2.5.2 Intrinsically Safe
An Intrinsically Safe (IS) installation potentially has flam-
mable media present. An approved IS barrier must be
installed in the non-hazardous (safe) area to limit the avail-
able energy out to the hazardous area.
See Agency Drawing – Intrinsically Safe Installation,
Section 3.5.2.
To install Intrinsically Safe wiring:
1. Ensure that the IS barrier is properly installed in the safe
area (refer to local plant or facility procedures). Complete
the wiring from the power supply to the barrier and from
the barrier to the ECLIPSE transmitter.
2. Remove the cover from the wiring compartment of the
transmitter. Install the conduit plug in the unused opening
and use PTFE tape/sealant to ensure a liquid-tight
connection.
3. Install a conduit fitting and pull the supply wires.
4. Connect shield to an earth ground at power supply.
5. Connect an earth ground wire to the nearest green ground
screw (not shown in illustration).
6. Connect the positive supply wire to the (+) terminal and
the negative supply wire to the (-) terminal. (The recom-
mended torque on terminal block screws is 7–10 in-lbs.)
7. Replace and tighten the cover to the wiring compartment
of the transmitter before applying power.

2.5.3 Explosion Proof


Explosion Proof (also referred to as XP or flameproof ) is
another method of designing equipment for installation
into hazardous areas. A hazardous location is an area in
which flammable gases or vapors are (or may be) present
in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or
ignitable mixtures.
The wiring for the transmitter must be contained in
Explosion Proof conduit extending into the safe area.
• Due to the specialized design of the ECLIPSE transmitter,
no Explosion Proof conduit fitting (EY seal) is required
within 18" of the transmitter.
• An Explosion Proof conduit fitting (EY seal) is required
between the hazardous and safe areas. See Agency
Specifications, Section 3.5.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 25


To install an Explosion Proof transmitter:
1. Install Explosion Proof conduit from the safe area to the
conduit connection of the ECLIPSE transmitter (refer to
local plant or facility procedures).
2. Remove the cover from the wiring compartment of the
transmitter.
3. Connect shield to an earth ground at the power supply.
4. Connect an earth ground wire to the nearest green ground
screw per local electrical code (not shown in illustration).
5. Connect the positive supply wire to the (+) terminal and
the negative supply wire to the (-) terminal. (The recom-
mended torque on terminal block screws is 7–10 in-lbs.)
6. Replace and tighten the cover to the wiring compartment
of the transmitter before applying power.

2.6 Configuration

Although the ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter can be


delivered pre-configured from the factory, it can also be
easily reconfigured in the shop or at the installation using
the local LCD/Keypad or PACTware/DTM. Bench config-
uration provides a convenient and efficient way to set up
the transmitter before going to the tank site to complete
the installation.
Before configuring any transmitter, collect all operating
parameters information (refer to Section 1.1.2).
Apply power to the transmitter and follow the step-by-step
procedures below for the menu-driven transmitter display.
Refer to Sections 2.6.2 and 2.6.4.
Information on configuring the transmitter using a HART
communicator is given in Section 2.7, Configuration
Using HART.
Refer to I/O manuals:
• 57-646 for information on FOUNDATION fieldbus output.
• 57-658 for information on PROFIBUS PA output.
• 41-621 for information on Modbus output.

2.6.1 Bench Configuration


The ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter can be easily config-
ured at a test bench by connecting a standard 24 VDC
power supply directly to the transmitter terminals as
shown in the accompanying diagram. An optional digital
multimeter is shown in the event that mA current mea-
surements are desired.

26 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


NOTE: Current measurements taken at these test points are an
approximate value. Accurate current readings should be
taken with the digital multimeter directly in series with the
loop.

NOTE: When using a HART communicator for configuration, a mini-


mum 250-ohm line load resistance is required. Refer to your
(-) negative
(+) positive
HART communicator manual for additional information.
+
Test

Current Meter NOTE: The transmitter can be configured without the probe.
Disregard the “No Probe” diagnostic indicator that will appear.
+
Power Supply

24 VDC 2.6.2 Menu Traversal and Data Entry
The four push buttons offer various forms of functionality
for navigation and data entry.
The Model 706 user interface is hierarchical in nature,
G.P./I.S./Explosion Proof Model
best described as a tree structure. Each level in the tree
contains one or more items. Items are either menu labels
or parameter names.
• Menu labels are presented in all capital letters
• Parameters are capital words

2.6.2.1 Navigating the Menu


UP moves to the previous item in the menu branch.


DOWN moves to the next item in the menu branch.



BACK moves back one level to the previous (higher)
branch item.
➪ ENTER enters into the lower level branch or switches
to the entry mode. Holding the ENTER down on any
highlighted menu name or parameter will show help
text for that item.

2.6.2.2 Data Selection


This method is used for selecting configuration data from
a specific list.

UP and DOWN to navigate the menu and high-


Up Down Back Enter
light the item of interest.
➪ ENTER allows modification of that selection.

UP and DOWN to choose new data selection.


➪ ENTER to confirm selection.

Use BACK (Escape) key at any time to abort the pro-
cedure and escape to previous branch item.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 27


2.6.2.3 Entering Numeric Data Using Digit Entry
This method is used to input numeric data, e.g., Probe
Length, set 4mA and set 20mA.
Push button Keystroke Action
Moves up to the next highest digit (0,1,2,3,....,9
Up or decimal point). If held down the digits scroll
until the push button is released.
Moves up to the next lowest digit (0,1,2,3,....,9 or
Down decimal point). If held down the digits scroll until
the push button is released.
Moves the cursor to the left and deletes a digit. If
the cursor is already at the leftmost position,
Back
then the screen is exited without changing the
previously saved value.
Moves the cursor to the right. If the cursor is
Enter located at a blank character position, the new
value is saved.

All numeric values are left-justified, and new values are


entered from left to right. A decimal point can be
entered after the first digit is entered, such that .9 is
entered as 0.9.
Some configuration parameters can have a negative
value. In this case, the leftmost position is reversed for
the sign (either "-" for a negative value, or "+" for a pos-
itive value).

2.6.2.4 Entering Numeric Data Using Increment/Decrement


Use this method to input the following data into para-
meters such as Damping and Failure Alarm.

Push button Keystroke Action


Increments the displayed value. If held down
the digits scroll until the push button is released.
Up Depending on which screen is being revised, the
increment amount may increase by a factor of 10
after the value has been incremented 10 times.
Decrements the displayed value. If held down the
digits scroll until the push button is released.
Depending on which screen is being revised, the
Down
decrement amount may increase by a factor of
10 after the value has been decremented 10
times.
Returns to the previous menu without changing
Back the original value, which is immediately redis-
played.
Accepts the displayed value and returns to the
Enter
previous menu.

28 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


2.6.2.5 Entering Character Data
This method is used for parameters requiring alphanumeric
character entry, such as for entering tags, etc.
General Menu Notes:

Push button Keystroke Action


Moves to the previous character (Z...Y...X...W).
Up If held down, the characters scroll until the push
button is released.
Moves to the next item character (A...B...C...D).
Down If held down, the characters scroll until the push
button is released.
Moves the cursor back to the left. If the cursor is
already at the leftmost position, then the screen
Back
is exited without changing the original tag char-
acters.
Moves the cursor forward to the right. If the
Enter cursor is at the rightmost position, then the
new tag is saved.

2.6.3 Password Protection


The ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter has three levels of
password protection to restrict access to certain portions of
the menu structure that affect the operation of the system.
The user password can be changed to any numerical value
up to 59999. When the transmitter is programmed for
password protection, a password is required whenever
configuration values are changed.
User Password
The User Password allows the customer to limit access to
the basic configuration parameters.
The default User Password installed in the transmitter at
the factory is 0. With a password of 0, the transmitter is no
longer password protected and any value in the basic user
menus can be adjusted without entering a confirming
password.

NOTE: If a User Password is not known or has been misplaced, the


menu item New Password in the DEVICE SETUP/ADVANCED
CONFIG menu displays an encrypted value representing the
present password. Contact Technical Support with this
encrypted password to retrieve the original User Password.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 29


Advanced Password
Certain portions of the menu structure that contain more
advanced parameters are further protected by an Advanced
Password.
This password will be provided, when necessary, by Factory
technical support.
Factory Password
Calibration-related and other factory settings are further
protected by a Factory Password.

2.6.4 Model 706 Menu: Step-By-Step Procedure


The following tables provide a complete explanation of the
software menus displayed by the ECLIPSE transmitter. The
menu layout is similar between the local Keypad/LCD
interface, the DD, and the DTM.
Use these tables as a step-by-step guide to configure the
transmitter based on the desired measurement type from the
following selections:
• Level Only
• Interface & Level
• Level & Volume
• Flow
HOME SCREEN
The Home Screen consists of a “slide show” sequence of
Measured Values screens which are rotated at 2-second
intervals. Each Home Measured Value screen can present up
to four information items:
• HART® Tag
• Measured Value
Label, Numerical Value, Units
• Status
Will be displayed as text or optionally with NAMUR NE
107 symbol
• Primary Value Bar Graph (shown in %)
Up Down Back Enter The Home Screen presentation can be customized by view-
ing or hiding some of these items. See DISPLAY CONFIG
under the DEVICE SETUP menu in Section 2.6.5 —
Configuration Menu.
At left is an example of a Home Screen for a Model 706
configured for a Level Only application.

30 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


MAIN MENU
Pressing any key on the Home Screen will present the Main
Menu, consisting of three basic menu labels shown in all
capital letters.
• DEVICE SETUP
• DIAGNOSTICS
• MEASURED VALUES
As shown, the reverse video represents a cursor identifying
the selected item, which will appear in reverse video on the
LCD. The actions of the keys at this point are:
Push button Keystroke Action

Up
No action as the cursor is already at the first
item in the MAIN MENU
Down Moves the cursor to DIAGNOSTICS

Back
Moves back to HOME SCREEN, the level
above MAIN MENU
Enter Presents the selected item, DEVICE SETUP

NOTES: 1. Items and parameters that are shown in lower level menus
will depend on the Measurement Type chosen. Those para-
meter not applicable to the present Measurement Type will
be hidden.
2. Holding down the Enter key when the cursor is highlighted
over a parameter or menu will provide additional information
about that item.

DEVICE SETUP
Choosing DEVICE SETUP from the MAIN MENU will
result in an LCD presentation as shown at left.
The small down arrow shown at the right hand side of the
screen is the indication that more items are available below
and can be accessed by pressing the DOWN key.
Section 2.6.5 shows the entire tree menu for the Model 706
DEVICE SETUP Menu.

DIAGNOSTICS
Refer to Section 3.3.4

MEASURED VALUES
Allows the user to scroll through all of the available
measured values for the measurement type chosen.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 31


2.6.5 Model 706 Configuration Menu — Device Setup
Home Screen

Main Menu

Device Setup Quick Start Level Units: Probe Length:


Identity Inches 12 inches to 100 feet
Basic Config Feet (30 cm to 30 m)
I/O Config Millimeters
Display Config Centimeters Level Offset:
Advanced Config Meters -25 feet to +75 feet
Factory Config (-7.6 m to 22.9 m)
Probe Model:
7YD Coax HTHP Dielectric Range:
7YF Sngl Rod Tanks Below 1.7
7YG Sngl Rod Cages 1.7 to 3.0
7YJ Sngl Rod Cages 3.0 to 10
7YL Sngl Rod Cages Above 10
7YM Sngl Rod Tanks
7YN Sngl Rod Tanks 4 mA Set Point (LRV):
7YP Coax HP -25 feet to +175 feet
7YS Coax Steam (-7.6 m to 53 m)
7YT Coax Std
7Y1 Sngl Flex Std 20 mA Set Point (URV):
7Y2 Sngl Flex Bulk -25 feet to +175 feet
7Y3 Sngl Flex HP (-7.6 m to 53 m)
7Y5 Twin Flex Bulk
7Y6 Sngl Flx HTHP Cage Failure Alarm:
7Y7 Twin Flex Clad 22 mA
3.6 mA
Probe Mount: Hold
NPT
BSP
Flange
NPT/Flushing
BSP/Flushing
Home Screen Flange/Flushing
Hygienic
Main Menu

Device Setup Quick Start


Identity Product Name (read only)
Magnetrol S/N (read only)
Hardware Version (read only)
Firmware Version (read only)
LongTag

Basic Config Measurement Type:


I/O Config Level Only Level Units: Probe Coating: (7yF only)
Display Config Interface and Level Inches None (Bare)
Advanced Config Interface and Volume Feet PFA Coated
Factory Config Volume and Level Millimeters
Flow Centimeters Probe Mount:
Meters NPT
BSP
Probe Model: Flange
7YD Coax HTHP NPT/Flushing
7YF Sngl Rod Std BSP/Flushing
7YG Sngl Rod Std Flange/Flushing
7YJ Sngl Rod HTHP Hygienic
7YL Sngl Rod HP
7YM Sngl Rod HP Probe Length:
7YN Sngl Rod HTHP 12 inches to 100 feet
7YP Coax HP (30 cm to 30 m)
7YS Coax Steam
7YT Coax Std Level Offset:
7Y1 Sngl Flex Std -25 feet to +75 feet
7Y2 Sngl Flex Bulk (-7.6 m to 22.9 m)
7Y3 Sngl Flex HP
7Y5 Twin Flex Bulk Dielectric Range:
7Y6 Sngl Flx HTHP Cage Below 1.7
7Y7 Twin Flex Clad 1.7 to 3.0
3.0 to 10
Above 10

32 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


2.6.5 Model 706 Configuration Menu — Device Setup
Home Screen

Main Menu

Device Setup Quick Start


Identity
Basic Config Measurement Type:
I/O Config Level Only
Display Config Interface and Level Level Units: Probe Coating: (7yF only)
Advanced Config Interface and Volume Inches None (Bare)
Factory Config Volume and Level Feet PFA Coated
Flow Millimeters
Centimeters Probe Mount:
Meters NPT
BSP
Probe Model: Flange
7YD Coax HTHP NPT/Flushing
7YF Sngl Rod Tanks BSP/Flushing
7YG Sngl Rod Cages Flange/Flushing
7YJ Sngl Rod Cages Hygienic
7YL Sngl Rod Cages
7YM Sngl Rod Tanks Probe Length:
7YN Sngl Rod Tanks 12 inches to 100 feet
7YP Coax HP (30 cm to 30 m)
7YS Coax Steam
7YT Coax Std Level Offset:
7Y1 Sngl Flex Std -25 feet to +75 feet
7Y2 Sngl Flex Bulk (-7.6 m to 22.9 m)
7Y3 Sngl Flex HP
7Y5 Twin Flex Bulk Dielectric Range:
7Y6 Sngl Flx HTHP Cage Below 1.7
Home Screen 7Y7 Twin Flex Clad 1.7 to 3.0
3.0 to 10
Main Menu Above 10

Device Setup Quick Start Upr Dielectric:


Identity 1.2 to 10
Measurement Type:
Basic Config Level Only
I/O Config Interface and Level
Display Config Interface and Volume
Advanced Config Volume and Level
Factory Config Flow

Level Units: Probe Coating: (7yF only) Volume Units: Vessel Dimensions:
Inches None (Bare) Cubic Feet (not used with Custom Table)
Feet PFA Coated Cubic Inches Radius
Millimeters Cubic Meters Ellipse Depth
Centimeters Probe Mount: Gallons Conical Height
Meters NPT Milliliters Width
BSP Liters Length
Probe Model: Flange Barrels
7YD Coax HTHP NPT/Flushing Custom Table Setup:
7YF Sngl Rod Std BSP/Flushing Vessel Type: Custom Table Type:
7YG Sngl Rod Std Flange/Flushing Rectangular Linear
7YJ Sngl Rod HTHP Hygienic Horizontal/Flat Spline
7YL Sngl Rod HP Horizontal/Ellipse
Horizontal/Spherical Level Input Source:
7YM Sngl Rod HP Probe Length:
Spherical Keypad
7YN Sngl Rod HTHP 12 inches to 100 feet
Vertical/Flat Sensor
7YP Coax HP (30 cm to 30 m)
7YS Coax Steam Vertical/Ellipse
Vertical/Spherical CUSTOM TABLE VALUES:
7YT Coax Std Level Offset:
Vertical/Conical Up to 30 Pairs of
7Y1 Sngl Flex Std -25 feet to +75 feet
Custom Table Level/Volume Data
7Y2 Sngl Flex Bulk (-7.6 m to 22.9 m)
7Y3 Sngl Flex HP
7Y5 Twin Flex Bulk Dielectric Range:
7Y6 Sngl Flx HTHP Cage Below 1.7
7Y7 Twin Flex Clad 1.7 to 3.0
3.0 to 10
Above 10

Volume Setup:

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 33


2.6.5 Model 706 Configuration Menu — Device Setup
Home Screen

Main Menu

Device Setup Quick Start


Identity
Basic Config Measurement Type:
I/O Config Level Only
Display Config Interface and Level
Advanced Config Interface and Volume
Factory Config Volume and Level
Flow

Level Units: Probe Mount: Flow Units: V-notch Weir Maximum Flow
Inches NPT Cubic Ft/Second V-notch Weir Angle: (calculated, read only)
Feet BSP Cubic Ft/Minute 22.5°
Millimeters Flange Cubic Ft/Hour 30° Low Flow Cutoff:
Centimeters NPT/Flushing Gallons/Minute 45° 0 to 9999999 cubic
Meters BSP/Flushing Gallons/Hour 60° ft/min
Flange/Flushing Mil Gallons/Day 90°
Probe Model: Hygienic Liters/Second 120° TOTALIZER SETUP:
7YD Coax HTHP Liters/Minute Units:
7YF Sngl Rod Std Probe Coating: Liters/Hour Rect Weir with Ends Cubic Feet
7YG Sngl Rod Std None (Bare) Cubic Meters/Hour 0 to 215.0 feet Gallons
7YJ Sngl Rod HTHP PFA Coated (0 to 65 m) Mil Gallons
7YL Sngl Rod HP Flow Element: Liters
7YM Sngl Rod HP Probe Length: Palmer-Bowlus Flume Rect Weir w/o Ends Mil Liters
7YN Sngl Rod HTHP 12 inches to 100 feet Flume Channel Width: 0 to 215.0 feet Cubic Meters
7YP Coax HP (30 cm to 30 m) 4 inches (0 to 65 m)
7YS Coax Steam 6 inches NON-RESET
7YT Coax Std Level Offset: 8 inches Cipolletti Weir TOTALIZER:
7Y1 Sngl Flex Std -25 feet to +75 feet 10 inches 0 to 215.0 feet Multiplier:
7Y2 Sngl Flex Bulk (-7.6 m to 22.9 m) 12 inches (0 to 65 m) 1
7Y3 Sngl Flex HP 15 inches 10
7Y5 Twin Flex Bulk Dielectric Range: 18 inches Generic Equation 100
7Y6 Sngl Flx HTHP Cage Below 1.7 21 inches K 1,000
7Y7 Twin Flex Clad 1.7 to 3.0 24 inches L 10,000
3.0 to 10 27 inches C 100,000
Above 10 30 inches n
Value (read only)
Flow Setup: Parshall Flume Custom Table RunTime (read only)
Flume Channel Width: Custom Table Type:
1 inch Linear RESETTABLE
2 inches Spline TOTALIZER:
3 inches Mode:
6 inches CUSTOM TABLE Disabled
9 inches VALUES: Enabled
12 inches Up to 30 Pairs of
18 inches Head/Flow Data Multiplier:
24 inches 1
36 inches Reference Distance: 10
48 inches 11.8 inches to 100 feet 100
60 inches (30 cm to 30 m) 1,000
72 inches 10,000
96 inches Maximum Head 100,000
120 inches The Maximum Head
144 inches value can be revised Value (read only)
depending on the value RunTime (read only)
of the Reference
Distance, or for end user Reset
preference.

34 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


2.6.5 Model 706 Configuration Menu — Device Setup
Home Screen

Main Menu

Device Setup Quick Start


Identity
Basic Config
I/O Config Primary Variable

4 mA Set Pt (LRV):
-25 to +175 feet ([Upr] Level, Ifc Level)
(-7.6 m to 53 m)
2.0 inches to 100 feet (Upr Thickness)
(5 cm to 30 m)
0 to 9999999 gals (Volume)
0 to 9999999 cubic ft/min (Flow)

20 mA Set Pt (URV):
-25 to +175 feet ([Upr] Level, Ifc Level)
(-7.6 m to 53 m)
2.0 inches to 100 feet (Upr Thickness)
(5 cm to 30 m)
0 to 9999999 cf (Volume)
0 to 9999999 cfs (Flow)

Failure Alarm:
22 mA
3.6 mA
Hold

Damping:
0 to 10 seconds

Display Config Language: Volume: Upr Echo Strength:


Advanced Config English (Volume and Level mode only) (Interface and level mode only)
Factory Config French Hide Hide
German View View
Spanish
Russian Flow: Ifc Echo Strength:
(Flow mode only) (Interface and level mode only)
Status Symbol: Hide Hide
Hide View View
View
Head: Elec Temp:
Long Tag: (Flow mode only) Hide
Hide Hide View
View View
Probe Buildup:
PV Bar Graph: Distance: (Buildup Detection = On)
Hide Hide Hide
View View View

Level: % Output:
Hide Hide
View View

Ifc Level: Analog Output:


(Interface and Level mode only) Hide
Hide View
View
NRTotalizer:
Upr Thickness: (Flow mode only)
(Interface and Level mode only) Hide
Hide View
View
R Totalizer:
(Flow mode only)
Hide
View

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 35


2.6.5 Model 706 Configuration Menu — Device Setup
Home Screen

Main Menu

Device Setup Quick Start


Identity
Basic Config
I/O Config
Display Config
Advanced Config
Factory Config

Sensitivity: Ifc Lvl Thresh Mode: Compensation:


0 to 100 echo strength units (Interface and Level only) None
Auto Largest Auto
Blocking Distance: Fixed Value Manual
-7.5 to +100 feet Vapor Dielectric
(-2 m to 30 m) Ifc Lvl Thresh Value: 1.00 to 2.00
(Interface and Level only)
Safety Zone Alarm: 0 to 100 echo strength units HF Cable Length:
None Integral
3.6 mA EoP Thresh Mode: 3 feet
22 mA Auto Largest 12 feet
Latched 3.6 mA Fixed Value
Latched 22 mA Buildup Detection:
EoP Thresh Value: Off
Safety Zone Height: 0 to 100 echo strength units On
(not used when Safety Alarm is
None) ENDofPROBE ANALYSIS: ANALOG OUTPUT:
2 inches to 100 feet EoP Polarity: HART Poll Address:
(5 cm to 30 m) Positive 0 to 63
Negative
Reset SZ Alarm Analog Output Mode:
(used when Safety Alarm is Latch EoP Analysis: Disabled (Fixed)
3.6 mA or Latch 22 mA) (not used with Interface and Level) Enabled (PV)
Off [Fixed Current Value]
Failure Alarm Delay: On 4 to 20 mA
0 to 5 seconds
EoP Dielectric: ADJUST ANALOG
Level Trim: (not used with Interface and Level) OUTPUT:
-2.00 to + 2.00 feet 1.20 to 9.99 Adjust 4mA
(-0.6 m to + 0.6 m) Adjust 20mA
ECHO REJECTION:
THRESHOLD SETTINGS View Echo Curve New User Password:
Lvl Thresh Mode: 0 to 59,999
Auto Largest REJECTION CONTROL:
(not used with Interface and Level) Reject Curve State: CONFIG CHANGED:
Fixed Value Off Indicator Mode:
Auto Upper Disabled Disabled
Sloped [Enabled] Enabled

Sloped Start Value: Reject Curve Mode: Reset Config Chngd:


(When Lvl Thresh Mode is Sloped) Level Reset?
Distance No
Lvl Thresh Value: Yes
0 to 100 echo strength units Saved Medium
Sloped Start Value Reset Parameters:
(used when Lvl Thresh Mode is NEW REJECT CURVE: No
Sloped) Actual Medium Yes
0 to 100 echo strength units Save Reject Curve

Sloped End Dist:


(used when Lvl Thresh Mode is
Sloped)
25 to 100 feet
(7 to 30 m)

36 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


2.6.5 Model 706 Configuration Menu — Device Setup
Home Screen

Main Menu

Device Setup Quick Start


Identity
Basic Config
I/O Config
Display Config
Advanced Config
Factory Config Fiducial Gain:
0 to 255 (read only)

Fid Threshold Value

SZ Hysteresis (Safe Zone Hysteresis):


(not used when Safe Zone Alarm is None)
0 to 100 feet
(0 to 30 m)

PROBE TARGET (Compensation = Auto):


Probe Target Mode
Off
Run
Calibrate
Targ Calib Ticks
Target Ticks

Elec Temp Offset

Ifc Boundary Offset

NAP Value

Factory Reset

FACTORY CALIB
(Factory password required)
Window
Fiducial Ticks
Conversion Factor
Scale Offset

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 37


2.7 Configuration Using HART

A HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer)


remote unit, such as a HART communicator, can be used to
provide a communication link to the ECLIPSE Model 706
transmitter. When connected to the control loop, the same
system measurement readings shown on the transmitter are
also shown on the communicator. The communicator can
also be used to configure the transmitter.
The HART communicator may need to be updated to
include the ECLIPSE Model 706 software (Device
Junction
Descriptions). Refer to your HART Communicator Manual
for update instructions.
One can also access configuration parameters using
RL > 250 Ω
- + PACTware and the Model 706 DTM, or using the AMS
with EDDL.

2.7.1 Connections
Control
Room
Display A HART communicator can be operated from a remote
Power location by connecting it to a remote junction or by con-
Supply
necting it directly to the terminal block in the wiring com-
partment of the ECLIPSE transmitter.
Current
Meter HART uses the Bell 202 frequency shift keying technique
of high-frequency digital signals. It operates on the 4–20
mA loop and requires 250 Ω load resistance. A typical con-
nection between a communicator and the ECLIPSE trans-
mitter is shown at left.

2.7.2 HART Communicator Display


A typical communicator display is an 8-line by 21-character
LCD. When connected, the top line of each menu displays
the model (Model 706) and its tag number or address. For
detailed operating information, refer to the instruction
manual provided with the HART communicator.

2.7.3 HART  Revision Table


Model 706 1.x
HART  Version HCF Release Date Compatible with 706 Software
Dev Rev 1, DD Rev 2 December 2012 Version 1.0 and later

2.7.4 HART Menu – Model 706


The ECLIPSE transmitter HART menu trees are shown in
the following pages. Open the menu by pressing the
alphanumeric key 4, then Device Setup, to display the
second-level menu.

38 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


2.7.4 HART Menu – Model 706
1 PV
2 PV Loop Current
3 PV % Range
4 Device Setup 1 Identity 1 Enter Password
5 Setup Wizard 2 Tag
6 Diagnostics 3 Long Tag
7 Measured Values 4 Descriptor
5 Date
1 Level 6 Message
2 Ifc Level 7 Date/Time/Initials
3 Upr Thickness 8 Factory Identity 1 Manufacturer
4 Volume 2 Product Name
5 Flow 2 Basic Config 1 Enter Password 3 Magnetrol S/N
6 Head 2 Level Units 4 Hardware Version
7 Distance 3 Probe Model 5 Firmware Version
8 R Totalizer Value 4 Probe Coating 6 ConfigChg Counter
9 NR Totalizer Value 5 Probe Mount 7 Final Assy Number
10 Echo Strength 6 Probe Length 8 Device ID
11 Ifc Echo Strength 7 Measurement Type 9 Universal Revision
12 Buildup 8 Level Offset 10 Field Device Revision
13 Temperature 9 Dielectric Range 11 Software Revision
10 Upper Dielectric 12 Num Preambles
11 Basic Config Diagram

3 Volume Config 1 Enter Password


2 Volume Units
3 Vessel Type
4 Length
5 Width
6 Radius
7 Ellipse Depth
8 Conical Height
9 Table Type
10 Vessel Diagrams
11 Custom Table Type
12 Level Input Source 1 Enter Password
13 Custom Table Length 2 Flow Units
14 Custom Table 3 Flow Element
4 Flume Channel Width
4 Flow Config
5 V-Notch Angle
6 Crest Length
7 Custom Table Type
8 Reference Distance
9 Maximum Head
10 Maximum Flow
11 Low Flow Cutoff
12 General Equation
Factors 1 K
1 Enter Password 13 Flow Diagrams 2 L
5 I/O Config
2 PV is 14 Custom Table 3 C
3 PV AmA Set Point 15 Totalizer Setup 4 n
6 Local Display Config
7 Advanced Config 4 PV 20mA Set Point
5 PV Failure Alarm 1 Totalizer Units
8 Factory Config
6 Damping 2 NR Mult
7 I/O Config Diagram 3 NR Totalizer Value
8 Variable Selection 1 SV is 4 NR Totalizer RunTime
9 Set Points 2 TV is 5 R Totalizer Mode
3 QV is 6 R Totalizer Mult
7 R Totalizer Value
8 R Totalizer RunTime
1 Lvl 4mA Set Point 9 Totalizer
2 Lvl 20mA Set Point
3 Ifc 4mA Set Point
4 Ifc 20mA Set Point
5 Thk 4mA Set Point
6 Thk 20mA Set Point
7 Vol 4mA Set Point
8 Vol 20mA Set Point
9 Flo 4mA Set Point
10 Flo 20mA Set Point

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 39


2.7.4 HART Menu – Model 706
1 Identity
2 Basic Config
3 Volume Config
4 Flow Config
5 I/O Config

6 Local Display
Config 1 Enter Password
2 Language
3 Status Symbol 1 Safety Zone Alarm
4 Long Tag 2 Safety Zone Height
5 PV Bar Graph 3 Reset SZ Alarm
6 Display Setup Diagram
7 Measured Values
1 Reject Curve State
2 Reject Curve Mode
3 Saved Media Location
4 New Rejection Curve

7 Advanced Config 1 Enter Password


2 Sensitivity 1 Level Threshold Mode
3 Blocking Distance 2 Level Threshold Value
4 Safety Zone Settings 3 Sloped Start Value
5 Failure Alarm Delay 4 Sloped End Distance
6 Level Trim 5 Interface Level Threshold Mode
7 Adv Config Diagram 6 Interface Level Threshold Value
8 Echo Rejection 7 EOP Threshold Mode
9 Threshold Settings 8 EOP Threshold Value
10 End-of-Probe Settings
11 Compensation
12 HF Cable Length 1 EOP Polarity
13 Buildup Detection 2 EOP Analysis
14 Analog Output 3 EOP Dielectric
15 New User Password
16 Reset Paramaters
1 Compensation Mode
2 Vapor Dielectric

1 Poll Address
2 Analog Output Mode
3 Fixed Loop Current
4 Adjust Analog Output
5 4mA Trim Value
6 20mA Trim Value
7 Fdbk 4mA Trim Value
8 Fdbk 20mA Trim Value

8 Factory Config 1 Enter Password


2 Fiducial Gain
3 Fid Thresh Value
4 Probe Target 1 Probe Target Mode
5 Elec Temp Offset 2 Target Calib
6 Ifc Boundary Offset 3 Target Ticks
7 NAPValue 4 Auto Target Calib
8 Factory Reset
9 Factory Param 2
10 Factory Param 3
11 Factory Param 4
12 Factory Calib

1 Window
2 Fiducial Ticks
3 Conversion Factor
4 Scale Offset
5 7YK Scale Offset

40 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


2.7.4 HART Menu – Model 706
1 PV
2 PV Loop Current
3 PV % Range
4 Device Setup
5 Setup Wizard
6 Diagnostics 1 Present Status 1 NE107 Category
7 Measured Values 2 NE107 Highest Active Indicator
3 Add’l Device Status 1 Status 0
4 Reset Config Changed 2 Status 1
5 NAMUR NE 107 Setup 3 Status 2
6 NE 107 Simulation Mode 4 Status 3
7 Enter Password 5 Status 4
6 Status 5

1 NE 107 Mapping
2 Reset NE 107 Mapping

2 Event History 1 Event Log


2 Refresh History
3 Reset History
4 Set Clock

3 Advanced 1 Internal Values 1 Fiducial Ticks


Diagnostics 2 Elec Temperatures 2 Fiducial Strength
3 Transmitter Tests 3 Level Ticks
4 Echo Curves 4 Probe Buildup 4 Echo Strength
5 Echo History 5 Distance
6 Trend Data 6 Ifc Ticks
7 Ifc Echo Strength
8 Ifc Boundary
9 Ifc Medium
10 Targ Calib Ticks
11 Target Ticks
12 Target Strength
13 Vapor Apparent Diel
14 EoP Ticks
15 EoP Strength
16 EoP Distance (mm)
17 EoP Apparent Diel
18 Fdbk Current

1 Present Temperature
2 Max Temperature
3 Min Temperature
4 Reset Min/Max Temps

1 Analog OutputTest

1 Percent of Level Threshold


2 Buildup Location
3 Buildup Rate
4 Check

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 41


2.7.4 HART Menu – Model 706
1 PV
2 PV Loop Current
3 PV % Range
4 Device Setup
5 Setup Wizard
6 Diagnostics 1 Present Status
7 Measured Values 2 Event History
3 Advanced
Diagnostics
4 Echo Curves 1 Echo Graph
2 Curve 1
3 Curve 2
4 Refresh Graph
5 Zoom
6 Save Ref Echo Curve
7 New Rejection Curve
8 Parameters 1 Enter Password
2 Dielectric Range
3 Sensitivity
4 Blocking Distance
5 Lvl Thresh Mode
6 Sloped Start Value
7 Lvl Thresh Value
8 Sloped End Distance
9 Ifc Lvl Thresh Value
10 EoP Thresh Value

5 Echo History 1 Echo Graph


2 Curve 1
3 Curve 2
4 Refresh Graph
5 Zoom
6 Echo History Log
7 Refresh History
8 History Setup 1 Echo History Mode
9 Delete History 2 Trigger Events
10 Set Clock 3 Time Triggers
4 Set Clock
5 Enter Password

6 Trend Data 1 Trend Data


2 Level
3 Ifc Level
4 Upr Thickness
5 Volume
6 Flow
7 Loop
8 Range
9 Analog Output
10 % Output
11 Echo Strength
12 Ifc Echo Strength
13 Data Log Setup 1 Trending Variables
2 Time Setup
3 Set Clock
4 Enter Password

42 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.0 Reference Information
This section presents an overview of the operation of the
ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Level
Transmitter, information on troubleshooting common prob-
lems, listings of agency approvals, lists of replacement and
recommended spare parts, and detailed physical, functional,
and performance specifications.

3.1 Transmitter Description

The ECLIPSE Model 706 is a loop-powered two-wire,


24 VDC, level transmitter based on the concept of Guided
Wave Radar.
The ECLIPSE Model 706 electronics are housed in an
ergonomic housing comprised of two tandem compartments
angled at a 45-degree angle for ease of wiring and calibra-
tion. These two compartments connect via a watertight
feedthrough.

3.2 Theory of Operation

3.2.1 Guided Wave Radar


24 VDC, 4-20 mA
Loop Powered
Guided Wave Radar (GWR) combines Time Domain
Reflectometry (TDR), Equivalent Time Sampling (ETS)
and modern low power circuitry. This synthesis of technolo-
gies brings to the level market a high-speed radar circuit
Transmit Pulse (speed of light transmission). The electromagnetic pulses are
A reflection is
propagated via a waveguide that yields a system many times
developed off the
liquid surface
more efficient than through-air radar.
Air εr = 1

3.2.2 Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR)


Media ε r > 1.4 TDR uses pulses of electromagnetic (EM) energy to mea-
A small amount of energy
continues down the probe
sure distances or levels. When a pulse reaches a dielectric
in a low dielectric fluid,
e.g. hydrocarbon
discontinuity (created by the surface of a process medium),
part of the energy is reflected. The larger the dielectric
discontinuity, the larger the amplitude (strength) of the
reflection.
Although TDR is relatively new to the industrial level mea-
surement industry, it has been used for decades in the tele-
phone, computer, and power transmission industries. In
these industries, TDR is used to successfully find wire or
cable breaks and shorts. An EM pulse is sent through the
wire, traveling unimpeded until it finds line damage due
to a break or short. A reflection is then returned from the
damaged area of the wire, enabling a timing circuit to
pinpoint the location.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 43


In the ECLIPSE transmitter, a waveguide with a characteristic
impedance in air is used as a probe. When part of the probe
is immersed in a material other than air, there is lower
impedance due to the fact that a liquid will have a higher
dielectric constant than air. When an EM pulse is sent
down the probe and meets the dielectric discontinuity that
occurs at the air/liquid surface, a reflection is generated.

3.2.3 Equivalent Time Sampling (ETS)


ETS (Equivalent Time Sampling) is used to measure the
high speed, low power EM energy. ETS is a critical key in
the application of TDR to vessel level measurement tech-
nology. The high speed EM energy (1000 ft/s) is difficult to
measure over short distances and at the resolution required
in the process industry. ETS captures the EM signals in real
time (nanoseconds) and reconstructs them in equivalent
time (milliseconds), which is much easier to measure with
today’s technology.
ETS is accomplished by scanning the waveguide to collect
thousands of samples. Approximately 5 scans are taken per
second; each scan gathers more than 50,000 samples.

3.2.4 Interface Detection


The ECLIPSE Model 706, when used with the appropriate
probes, is a transmitter capable of measuring both an upper
level and an interface level. It is required that the upper
liquid have a dielectric constant between 1.4 and 10 and the
Reference
Signal two liquids have a difference in dielectric constants greater
than 10. A typical application would be oil over water, with
Air
the upper layer of oil being non-conductive with a dielectric
(ε = 1) constant of approximately 2 and the lower layer of water
being very conductive with a dielectric constant of approxi-
mately 80. This interface measurement can only be accom-
Low Dielectric
Upper Level
Medium
plished when the dielectric constant of the upper medium is
Signal
(e.g. oil, ε = 2) lower than the dielectric constant of the lower medium.
Interface
Level
Signal
Emulsion Layer As mentioned above ECLIPSE Guided Wave Radar is based
High Dielectric upon the technology of TDR, which utilizes pulses of elec-
Medium tromagnetic energy transmitted down a wave guide (probe).
(e.g. water, ε = 80)
Time
When the transmitted pulse reaches a liquid surface that has
a higher dielectric constant than the air (dielectric constant
Interface Detection of 1) in which it is traveling, the pulse is reflected and ultra
high speed timing circuitry provides an accurate measure of
liquid level. Even after some of the pulse is reflected from
the upper surface, energy continues down the length of the
probe through the upper liquid. The pulse is again reflected
when it reaches the higher dielectric lower liquid (refer to
figure at left). Since the propagation speed of the signal
through the upper liquid is dependent on the dielectric

44 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


constant of the medium in which it is traveling, the dielectric
constant of the upper liquid must be known to accurately
determine the interface level.
The thickness of the upper layer can be determined by
knowing the time between the first and second reflections
as well as the upper layer dielectric constant.
In order to properly process the reflected signals, the
Model 706 is specified for those applications where the
thickness of the upper layer is greater than 2 inches (5 cm).
The maximum upper layer is typically limited to the length
of the probe.
Emulsion Layers
As emulsion (rag) layers can decrease the strength of the
reflected signal, GWR offers best performance in applica-
tions having clean, distinct layers. However, the ECLIPSE
Model 706 transmitter will operate in most emulsions and
tend to read the top of the emulsion layer. Contact the
factory for application assistance and questions regarding
emulsion layers.

3.2.5 Saturated Steam Applications


(Boilers, Feedwater Heaters, etc.)
As the temperature of a saturated steam application
increases, the dielectric constant of the steam vapor space
also increases. This increase in vapor space dielectric causes
a delay in the GWR signal propagation as it travels down
the probe, causing the liquid level to appear lower than
actual.

NOTE: The measurement error associated with this propagation delay


does depend on temperature and is a function of the square
root of the vapor space dielectric constant. For example, with
no compensation, a +450 °F (+230 °C) application would show
a level error of about 5.5%, while a +600 °F (+315 °C) applica-
tion would show an error approaching 20%!

The ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter and Model 7yS


Coaxial Steam probe provide a unique solution to this
application. The effects of the changing steam conditions
can be compensated for by utilizing a mechanical steam
target placed inside and near the top of the Model 7yS
coaxial probe.
Knowing exactly where the target is located at room tem-
perature, and then continuously monitoring its apparent
location, the vapor space dielectric can be back-calculated.
Knowing the vapor space dielectric, accurate compensation
of the actual liquid level reading is accomplished.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 45


This is a patented technique with two US Patents
(US 6642801 and US 6867729) issued for both the
mechanical target concept and the associated software
algorithm.
Contact the factory for additional information relating to
saturated steam applications.

3.2.6 Overfill Capability


Although agencies like WHG or VLAREM certify Overfill
proof protection, defined as the tested, reliable operation
when the transmitter is used as overfill alarm, it is assumed
in their analysis that the installation is designed in such a
way that the vessel or side mounted cage cannot physically
overfill.
However, there are practical applications where a GWR
probe can be completely flooded with level all the way up
to the process connection (face of the flange). Although the
affected areas are application dependent, typical GWR
probes have a transition zone (or possibly dead zone) at the
top of the probe where interacting signals can either affect
the linearity of the measurement or, more dramatically,
result in a complete loss of signal.
While some manufacturers of GWR transmitters may use
special algorithms to “infer” level measurement when this
undesirable signal interaction occurs and the actual level
signal is lost, the ECLIPSE Model 706 offers a unique solu-
tion by utilizing a concept called Overfill-Safe Operation.
An Overfill-safe probe is defined by the fact that it has a
predictable and uniform characteristic impedance all the
way down the entire length of the waveguide (probe). These
probes allow the ECLIPSE Model 706 to measure accurate
levels up to the process flange without any non-measurable
zone at the top of the GWR probe.
Overfill-safe GWR probes are unique to ECLIPSE GWR,
and coaxial probes can be installed at any location on the
vessel. Overfill-safe probes are offered in a variety of Coaxial
and Caged designs.

3.3 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

The ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter is designed and engi-


neered for trouble-free operation over a wide range of oper-
ating conditions. The transmitter continuously runs a series
of internal self-tests and displays helpful messages on the
large graphic liquid crystal display (LCD) when attention is
required.

46 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


The combination of these internal tests and diagnostics
messages offer a valuable proactive method of troubleshoot-
ing. The device not only tells the user what wrong, but also,
and more importantly, offers suggestions on how to solve
the problem.
All of this information can be obtained directly from the
transmitter on the LCD, or remotely by using a HART
communicator or PACTware and the ECLIPSE Model 706
DTM.
PACTware™ PC Program
The ECLIPSE Model 706 offers the ability to perform
more advanced diagnostics such as Trending and Echo
Curve analysis using a PACTware DTM. This is a powerful
troubleshooting tool that can aid in the resolution of any
diagnostic indicators that may appear.
Refer to section 4.0 “Advanced Configuration/
Troubleshooting Techniques” for additional information.

3.3.1 Diagnostics (Namur NE 107)


The ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter includes an exhaus-
tive list of Diagnostic Indicators which follow the NAMUR
NE 107 guidelines.
NAMUR is an international user association of automation
technology in process industries, whose goal is to promote
the interest of the process industry by pooling experiences
among its member companies. In doing so, this group
promotes international standards for devices, systems, and
technologies.
The objective of NAMUR NE 107 was essentially to make
Red Orange
maintenance more efficient by standardizing diagnostics
information from field devices. This was initially integrated
via FOUNDATION fieldbus, but the concept applies regardless
of the communication protocol.
According to the NAMUR NE107 recommendation, "Self
Monitoring and Diagnosis of Field Devices," fieldbus diag-
nostic results should be reliable and viewed in the context of
a given application. The document recommends categorizing
internal diagnostics into four standard status signals:
• Failure
• Function Check
Yellow Blue • Out of Specification
• Maintenance required
These categories are shown by both symbols and colors,
depending on the display capability.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 47


In essence, this approach ensures that the right diagnostic
information is available to the right person-at the right
time. In addition, it allows diagnostics to be applied, as
most appropriate, for a particular plant application (such as
process control engineering or asset management mainte-
nance). Customer specific mapping of diagnostics to these
categories allows for flexible configuration depending on the
user's requirements.
From an external Model 706 transmitter perspective, diag-
nostic information includes measurement of process condi-
tions, in addition to detection of internal device or system
anomalies.
As mentioned above, the indicators can be assignable (via
the DTM or host system) by the user to any (or none) of
the NAMUR recommended Status Signal categories:
Failure, Function Check, Out of Specification, and
Maintenance Required.
The FOUNDATION fieldbus transmitter version of the
Model 706 was implemented according to the Field
Analog Output Error Diagnostics Profile, which is consistent with the objectives
Failure
of NE 107.
In the FOUNDATION fieldbus version, diagnostic indicators
Function
can be mapped to multiple categories, an example is shown
Check in the diagram at left.

Dry
Echo Lost
Out of
In this example, “Calibration Required” is mapped to both
High
Temperature
Probe Specification the Out of Specification and Maintenance Required status
signals, and the diagnostic indicator named “High
Calibration
Required
Temperature” is mapped to none of the signals.
Maintenance
Required Indicators that are mapped to the Failure category will nor-
mally result in a current loop alarm output. The alarm state
for HART transmitters is configurable as high (22 mA),
Diagnostic Indicators NE-107
Status Signals Low (3.6 mA), or Hold (last value).
Users will not have the ability to unassign certain indicators
from the Failure signal category as the Model 706 user
interfaces will prohibit or reject such re-assignment entries).
This is to ensure that current loop alarms are asserted in situ-
ations where the device is not able to provide measurements
due to critical failures. (For example, if the alarm selection
has not been set to Hold, or a fixed current mode is in
effect.)
A default mapping of all diagnostic indicators will be applied
initially, and can be re-applied through use of a reset function.

48 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


Refer to the table below for a complete listing of the
Model 706 diagnostic indicators, along with their explana-
tions, default categories, and recommended remedies.

NOTES: 1) The remedies shown in this table can also be seen on


the transmitter LCD by viewing the present status
screen when the device is in a diagnostic condition.
2) Those indicators showing failure as the default result
in an alarm condition.

3.3.2 Diagnostic Indication Simulation


The DD and DTM allow for the ability to manipulate
diagnostic indicators. Intended as a means to verify the
configuration of the diagnostic parameters and connected
equipment, a user can manually change any indicator to
and from the active state.

3.3.3 Diagnostic Indicator Table


Below is a listing of the Model 706 diagnostic indicators,
showing their priority, explanations and recommended
remedies. (Priority 1 is highest priority.)
Default
Priority Indicator Name Explanation Remedy (Context Sensitive Help)
Category

Software Error
Unrecoverable error occurred in stored
1 Failure
program.
2 RAM Error Failure RAM (read/write) memory failing.

3 ADC Error Failure Analog-to-digital converter failure. Contact MAGNETROL Technical Support.

4 EEPROM Error Failure Non-volatile parameter storage failing.

5 Analog Board Error Failure Unrecoverable hardware failure.

Analog Output
Actual loop current deviates from com-
Error
Perform Adjust Analog Output mainte-
6 Failure manded value. Analog output is inaccu-
nance procedure.
rate.
7 Spare Indicator 1 OK Reserved for future use.
Default
Parameters
Saved parameters are set to default val-
8 Perform complete Device Configuration.
ues.
Attach a probe.
Torque HF nut.

No Probe
Clean gold pin on transmitter and socket
9 Failure No Probe Connected. on probe.
Ensure Model 705 style probe is not
being used.
Contact MAGNETROL Technical Support.
Torque HF nut.
Clean gold pin on transmitter and socket
on probe.

No Fiducial
Check settings:
10 Failure Reference signal too weak to detect. Fiducial Gain
HF Cable Length
Window
Increase Fid Gain.
Contact MAGNETROLTechnical Support.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 49


3.3.3 Diagnostic Indicator Table
Default
Priority Indicator Name Explanation Remedy
Category

Check settings:
Dielectric Range

No Echoes
Sensitivity
11 Failure No signal detected anywhere on probe. EoP Thresh Value
Increase Sensitivity.
Lower EoP Thresh.
View Echo Curve.

Check settings:
Upper Dielectric,

Upr Echo Lost


Blocking Distance,
Signal from upper liquid too weak to
12 Failure Sensitivity
detect.
Ensure Upr Level is below blocking dis-
tance.
View Echo Curve.
13 Spare Indicator 2 OK Reserved for future use.

Check settings:
EoP Above
Probe Length
ProbeEnd
End of Probe appears above Probe
14 Failure Decrease Sensitivity
Length
Increase Blocking Distance
View Echo Curve.

Check settings:

Lvl Below
Probe Model,
Level signal appears beyond Probe
ProbeEnd
Probe Length,
15 Failure Length.
Level Threshold = Fixed
(Possible water bottom situation)
Increase Sensitivity
View Echo Curve.

Check settings:
EoP Below
Probe Length
ProbeEnd
End of Probe appears beyond Probe
16 Failure Dielectric Range
Length.
Sensitivity
View Echo Curve.

Safety Zone Alarm


Risk of echo loss if liquid rises above Ensure that liquid cannot reach
17 Failure
Blocking Distance. Blocking Distance.

Config Conflict
Measurement type and primary variable Confirm proper configuration.
18 Failure
selection parameters are inconsistent. Check Measurement Type.

High Volume Alarm


Volume calculated from Level reading Check settings:
19 Failure exceeds capacity of vessel or custom Vessel Dimensions,
table. Custom Table entries

Check settings:

High Flow Alarm


Flow calculated from Distance reading Flow Element
20 Failure exceeds capacity of flow element or Reference Distance
custom table. Gen Eqn Factors
Custom Table entries

21 Spare Indicator 3 OK Reserved for future use

Initializing
Function Distance measurement is inaccurate Standard start-up message. Wait for up
22
Check while internal filters are settling. to 10 seconds.

Analog Output
Loop current not following PV. May be If unexpected, check Loop Current
Fixed
Function
23 caused by existing alarm condition, ongoing Mode. Ensure device is not in Loop
Check
Loop Test or Trim Loop operations. Test.

Config Changed
Function A parameter has been modified from the If desired, reset Config Changed indica-
24
Check User Interface. tor in ADVANCED CONFIG menu.

50 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.3.3 Diagnostic Indicator Table

Default
Priority Indicator Name Explanation Remedy
Category
25 Spare Indicator 4 OK Reserved for future use.

26 Spare Indicator 5 OK Reserved for future use.

Ramp Interval
Check accuracy of Level reading.
Error
Internal signal timing out of limits causing
27 Out of Spec Replace transmitter electronics.
inaccurate distance measurement.
Contact MAGNETROL Technical Support.

High Elec Temp


Electronics too hot. May compromise Shield transmitter from heat source or
28 Out of Spec level measurement or damage instru- increase air circulation. Locate transmit-
ment. ter remotely in a cooler area.

Low Elec Temp


Electronics too cold. May compromise Insulate transmitter.
29 Out of Spec level measurement or damage instru- Locate transmitter remotely in a warmer
ment. area.

Calibration Req’d Out of Spec Measurement accuracy may be dimin-


Factory calibration has been lost.
Return transmitter to factory for recali-
30
bration.
ished.

Echo Reject
Echo Rejection inoperative. May report
Invalid
31 Out of Spec erroneous Level readings. Upr Echo Save a fresh Echo Rejection Curve.
may be lost near top of probe.

Inferred Level
Distance measurement calculated indi- Verify Level reading. If incorrect, com-
32 Out of Spec rectly from probe elongation. Level pare Dielectric Range against EoP
reading is only approximate. Dielectric reading.

Adjust Analog Out Out of Spec Loop current is inaccurate.


Perform Adust Analog Output mainte-
33
nance procedure.

Totalizer Data
Lost
Non-volatile Totalizer Data storage fail- Contact MAGNETROL Technical
34 Out of Spec
ing. Support.

No Probe Target
Check settings:
35 Out of Spec Not actively compensating Probe Model
Sensitivity

Low Supply
Voltage
Loop current may be incorrect at high- Verify loop resistance.
36 Out of Spec
er values. Analog output is inaccurate. Replace loop power supply.

Dry Probe
No liquid is contacting probe. Level at If unexpected, verify proper probe
37 OK
unknown distance beyond probe. length for application.
38 Spare Indicator 6 OK Reserved for future use.

Check settings:
Low Echo Strength
Maintenance Dielectric Range
39 Risk of Echo Lost due to weak signal.
Required Sensitivity
View Echo Curve.

Check settings:
Low Ifc Echo Str
Maintenance Risk of Interface Echo Lost due to Dielectric Range
40
Required weak signal. Sensitivity
View Echo Curve.

41 Spare Indicator 7 OK Reserved for future use.

Sequence Record
A Sequence Record number has been If desired, report Sequence Record
42 OK
stored in Event Log. number to factory.

The ECLIPSE Model 706 offers the ability to do Trending and Echo Curve analysis via the local graphical LCD or by using PACTware and the Model 706 DTM.
The Model 706 DTM is a power troubleshooting tool that can aid in the resolution of some of the Diagnostic Indicators shown above.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 51


3.3.4 Diagnostic Help
Selecting DIAGNOSTICS from the MAIN MENU
presents a list of five ITEMS from the top level of the
DIAGNOSTICS tree.
When Present Status is highlighted, the highest
MAGNETROL priority active diagnostic indicator (numer-
ically lowest in Table 3.3.3) is displayed on the bottom
LCD line, which is “OK” as shown at left. Pressing the
ENTER key moves the active diagnostic indicator to the
top line outdented and presents in the lower area of the
LCD a brief explanation of and possible remedies for the
indicated condition. A blank line separates the explanation
from the remedies. Additional active diagnostic indicators,
if any, appear with their explanations in descending priority
order. Each additional active indicator name-explanation
pair is separated by a blank line from the one above.
If the explanation and remedy text (and additional name-


explanation pairs) exceeds the available space, a appears
in the rightmost column of the last line indicating more text
below. In this situation, the DN key scrolls text up one line
at a time. Similarly, while text exists above the upper line of

the text field, a appears in the rightmost column of the
top (text) line. In this situation, the UP key scrolls the text
down one line at a time. Otherwise the DN and UP keys
are inoperative. In all cases the ENT or DEL key reverts to
the previous screen.
When the transmitter is operating normally and the high-
light cursor is positioned on Present Status, the bottom
LCD line displays “OK” because no diagnostic indicators
are active.
EVENT HISTORY – This menu displays the parameters
related to diagnostic event logging.
ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS – This menu displays para-
meters related to some of the advanced diagnostics available
within the Model 706.
INTERNAL VALUES – Displays read-only internal
parameters.
ELEC TEMPERATURES – Displays temperature
information as measured in the potted module in
degrees F or C.
TRANSMITTER TESTS – Allows the user to
manually set the output current to a constant value.
This is a method for the user to verify operation of the
other equipment in the loop.
ECHO CURVES – This menu allows the user to display
the live Echo Curve and Echo Rejection on the LCD.
52 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter
ECHO HISTORY SETUP – The Model 706 contains the
unique and powerful feature that allows waveforms to be
automatically captured based on Diagnostic Events, Time or
both. This menu contains those parameters that configure
that feature.
Eleven (11) waveforms can be saved directly into the trans-
mitter.
• Nine (9) Troubleshooting Curves
• One (1) Echo Rejection Curve
• One (1) Reference Curve
TREND DATA – A 15-minute trend of the PV can be
displayed on the LCD.

3.3.5 Troubleshooting Application Issues


There can be numerous reasons for application-related
issues. Media buildup on the probe is covered here.
Media buildup on the probe is typically not a problem in
most cases—ECLIPSE circuitry works very effectively.
Media buildup should be viewed as two types:
• Continuous Film Coating
• Bridging

Film 3.3.5.1 Model 706 (Dual Element Coaxial or Twin Flexible


Coating
probe)
Continuous Film Coating
One type of potential application problem is when the
media forms a continuous coating on the probe. Although
the ECLIPSE Model 706 will continue to measure effectively,
some small inaccuracies may occur as the signal propagation
is affected by the thickness, length, and dielectric constant
of the coating.
It is a very rare case where filming causes a noticeable per-
formance degradation.
Bridging
Bridging
A more common coating problem occurs when the process
medium is viscous or solid enough to actually clog, or
bridge, between the elements. This bridging can cause a
noticeable degradation in performance. For example, high
dielectric media (e.g., water-based) can be detected as level
at the location of the bridging.
Similarly, a problem can develop if the product begins to
build up on the spacers that separate the coaxial probe ele-
ments. High dielectric media (e.g., water-based) will cause
the greatest error.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 53


Single rod GWR probes are typically the best probes for
applications with potential buildup, but other factors in the
application must be considered (such as mounting, sensitivi-
ty, etc). For this reason, the ECLIPSE Model 706 is offered
with a variety of coaxial, single rod, and Twin Flexible
probes so the correct probe can be used for the given
application.
Refer to Section 3.6.4 for viscosity specifications on the
various ECLIPSE probes.
Contact the factory for any questions regarding
applications with potential coating and buildup.

3.3.5.2 Model 706 (Single Rod Probe)


¡ The Model 706 and Single Rod probe were designed to
operate effectively in the presence of media building up.
¬
Coating
Buildup
Some expected error may be generated based upon the
following factors:
1. Dielectric of the media that created the coating
¿ 2. Thickness of the coating
3. Amount (length) of the coating above the present level
Although more immune to thick, viscous, buildup, perfor-
mance of Single Rod GWR probes is always dependent on
the installation and application. The electromagnetic field
surrounding a single rod probe makes it more vulnerable to
Process Seal is
Fully Transparent influence from objects in the vicinity of the probe.

NOTE: It is important to note that this influence from the


installation/application also depends on the configuration of
the transmitter. Those devices configured with lower gain will
be less affected by external objects.

Nozzles
Due to the impedance mismatch that takes place at the end
Coaxial Probe of a nozzle, they can create false echoes that can cause diag-
nostic indicators and/or errors in measurement.
As mentioned above, by virtue of the pure physics of the
technology, all single rod GWR probes are influenced by
the application and installation. Mismatches in impedance
Large Impedance along the length of the probe, whether they be expected
Mismatch
(liquid level) or unexpected (metal in close proximity), will
result in reflections.
To better illustrate this, a comparison between a coaxial
probe and single rod probe mounted in the same application
is shown at left.

Standard Single Rod Probe

54 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


Since the outer tube of the coaxial probe is grounded, there
are no proximity affects and there is no influence from the
Mismatch Depends
nozzle. The only reflections along the length of the probe
on Mounting are expected. Those being the fiducial (reference signal) and
the return signal from the process.
On the other hand, a single rod probe mounted in the exact
same nozzle will have additional (unwanted) reflections
where the probe enters and exits the nozzle. These reflec-
tions are a result of the impedance changes that occur at
those points:
Single Rod Probe in a Stillwell
• The large reflection is due to the impedance developed
between the rod and nozzle ID as compared to the imped-
ance developed between the rod and the tank ID. (The larg-
er the nozzle ID, the smaller the reflection).
One way to eliminate the reflection at the bottom of the
nozzle is to use a continuous stillwell in conjunction with a
caged GWR probe. In doing so, there will be no impedance
changes all the way down the probe.
Refer to Section 3.2.6 for a discussion on overfill-capable
probes for suggestions on how to eliminate these unwanted
single rod reflections. MAGNETROL is unique in the fact
that we offer a special caged probe that, when installed
Caged Probe
(waveform is similar to that of a coaxial probe)
properly, has no unwanted reflections.
Obstructions
Nozzles
• 2" Diameter minimum
Metallic obstructions in the vicinity of a single rod probe
• Ratio of Diameter: can also affect the performance. If the level reading repeat-
Length should be >1:1
• Do not use Pipe Reducers (restriction) edly locks on to a specific level higher than the actual level,
it may be caused by a metallic obstruction. Obstructions in
the vessel (e.g., pipes, ladders) that are located close to the
probe may cause the instrument to show them as level.
Obstruction
Refer to the Probe Clearance Table for recommended clear-
ance distances. The distances shown in this table can be dra-
matically reduced by utilizing the Echo Rejection feature
(within the transmitter or) in PACTware and the ECLIPSE
Model 706 DTM.

NOTE: Use caution when rejecting large positive going signals as the
negative going level signal can be lost when passing through
them.
PROBE CLEARANCE TABLE
Distance Acceptable Objects
to Probe
Continuous, smooth, parallel conductive surface, for example a metal tank wall;
<6" (15 cm)
important that probe does not touch wall
>6" (15 cm) <1" (25mm) diameter pipe and beams, ladder rungs

>12" (30 cm) <3" (75mm) diameter pipe and beams, concrete walls

>18" (46 cm) All remaining objects

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 55


3.4 Configuration Information

This section is intended to offer additional configuration-


related details with respect to some of the parameters
shown in the Menu in Section 2.6.

3.4.1 Level Offset Description


The parameter referred to as Level Offset in the ECLIPSE
Model 706 DEVICE SETUP/BASIC CONFIG menu is
defined as the desired level reading when liquid surface is
at the tip of the probe.
The ECLIPSE Model 706 transmitter is shipped from the
factory with Level Offset set to 0. With this configuration,
all measurements are referenced from the bottom of the
probe. See Example 1.
Level Units = inches
Example 1 (Level Offset = 0 as shipped from factory):
Probe Model = 7YT Application calls for a 72-inch Model 7yT coaxial probe
with an NPT process connection. The process medium is
Probe Mount = NPT
water with the bottom of the probe 10 inches above the
20 mA
Probe Length = 72 in bottom of the tank.
Level Offset = 0 in The user wants the 4 mA Set Point (LRV) at 24 inches
60" and the 20 mA Set Point (URV) at 60 inches as
Dielectric Range =
Above 10 referenced from the bottom of the probe.
4 mA

24" 4 mA = 24 in In those applications in which it is desired to reference all


10" measurements from the bottom of the vessel, the value of
20 mA = 60 in
Level Offset should be changed to the distance between the
Example 1 bottom of the probe and the bottom of the vessel as shown
in Example 2.
Example 2:
Application calls for a 72-inch Model 7yT coaxial probe
Level Units = inches
with an NPT process connection. The process medium is
Probe Model = 7YT water with the bottom of the probe 10 inches above the
bottom of the tank.
Probe Mount = NPT
The user wants the 4 mA Set Point (LRV) at 24 inches
Probe Length = 72 in
20 mA and the 20 mA Set Point (URV) at 60 inches as
Level Offset = 10 in
referenced from the bottom of the tank.
Dielectric Range =
When the ECLIPSE transmitter is mounted in a
Above 10
60"
chamber/bridle, it is usually desirable to configure the unit
4 mA
4 mA = 24 in with the 4 mA Set Point (LRV) at the lower process con-
10"
24"
nection and the 20 mA Set Point (URV) at the upper
20 mA = 60 in
process
connection. The measuring range then becomes the center-
Example 2
to-center dimension. In this case, a negative Level Offset
needs to be entered. In doing so, all measurements are then
referenced at a point up on the probe, as shown in
Example 3.

56 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


Example 3:
Level Units = inches Application calls for a 48-inch Model 7yG caged-coaxial
flanged probe measuring water in a chamber with the
Probe Model = 7YG
bottom of the probe extending 6 inches below the lower
Probe Mount = Flange
process connection. The user wants the 4 mA point to
be 0 inches at the bottom process connection and the
20 mA
Probe Length = 48 in 20 mA point to be 30 inches at the top process connection.
Level Offset =-6.0 in
30" 3.4.2 End-of-Probe Analysis
Dielectric Range =
Above 10 A new addition to the Model 706 ECLIPSE transmitter is a
4 mA 4 mA = 0in feature called End-of-Probe Analysis (EoPA).
6"

20 mA = 30 in
Located in the DEVICE SETUP/ADVANCED CONFIG
Menu, this feature is patterned after the “Tank-Bottom
Example 3 Following” algorithms of the early Non-Contact radar
transmitters. When the return signal from the level is lost,
this feature allows the Model 706 transmitter to infer level
measurement based on the apparent location of the end-of-
probe (EoP) signal.
Due to the fact that the propagation of the GWR signal is
affected by the dielectric constant of the medium in which
it is traveling, signals along the probe are delayed in propor-
tion to the dielectric constant. By monitoring the location
of the (delayed) EoP signal and knowing the dielectric con-
stant of the medium, the level signal can be back-calculated,
or inferred.
The End-of-Probe Analysis feature is located in the
Advanced Config menu and requires an Advanced Password
to activate. Several additional parameters will need to be
configured for optimum performance.

NOTE: The accuracy of this level measurement mode is not that of


detecting true product level, and can vary depending on the
process. MAGNETROL recommends that this feature be used
only as last resort for measuring levels in those rare applica-
tions in which the level signals are inadequate, even after the
common troubleshooting techniques of gain increase and
threshold adjustment are implemented.
Refer to section 4.0 “Advanced Configuration/
Troubleshooting Techniques” or contact MAGNETROL
Technical Support for additional instructions.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 57


3.4.3 Echo Rejection
Due to the fact that GWR transmitters are less susceptible
to obstructions in a vessel (as compared with Non-Contact
Radar transmitters) , early versions of the ECLIPSE Model
705 transmitters did not have Echo Rejection capability.
However, due to our vast experience in the field, we have
found that there are (albeit rare) occasions when it is desir-
able to have the ability to “ignore” unwanted signals along
the probe.
The Model 706 transmitter Echo Rejection feature is
located in the DEVICE SETUP/ADVANCED CONFIG
menu, and requires an Advanced Password to activate. It is
highly recommended that this feature be used with the
waveform capture capability of the Model 706 DTM and
PACTware™.
Refer to Section 4 “Advanced Configuration/
Troubleshooting Techniques” or contact MAGNETROL
Technical Support for additional instructions.

3.4.4 Volumetric Capability


Selecting Measurement Type = Volume and Level allows the
Model 706 transmitter to measure volume as the Primary
Measured Value.

3.4.4.1 Configuration using built-in Vessel Types


The following table provides an explanation of each of the
System Configuration parameters required for volume
applications that use one of the nine Vessel Types.

Configuration Parameter Explanation

A selection of Gallons (factory default Volume Unit), Milliliters, Liters, Cubic Feet, or Cubic
Volume Units
Inches, is provided.

Select either Vertical/Flat (factory default Vessel Type), Vertical/Elliptical, Vertical/Spherical,


Vertical/Conical, Custom Table, Rectangular, Horizontal/Flat, Horizontal/Elliptical,
Vessel Type Horizontal/Spherical, or Spherical.
Note: Vessel Dims is the next screen only if a specific Vessel Type was selected. If Custom Table
was selected. Refer to page 61 to select the Cust Table Type and Cust Table Vals.

Vessel Dims See the vessel drawings on the following page for relevant measuring areas.

Radius Used for all Vessel Types with the exception of Rectangular.

Ellipse Depth Used for Horizontal and Vertical/Elliptical vessels.

Conical Height Used for Vertical/Conical vessels.

Width Used for Rectangular vessels.

Length Used for Rectangular and Horizontal vessels.

58 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


Vessel Types

hoRIzonTal/sphERICal

sphERICal

hoRIzonTal/EllIpTICal

VERTICal/EllIpTICal VERTICal/sphERICal

RECTangulaR

VERTICal/FlaT VERTICal/ConICal

hoRIzonTal/FlaT

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 59


3.4.4.2 Configuration using Custom Table
If none of the nine Vessel Types shown can be used, a
Custom Table can be created. A maximum of 30 points can
be used to establish the level to volume relationship. The
following table provides an explanation of each of the
System Configuration parameters for volume applications
where a Custom Table is needed.

Configuration Parameter Explanation (Custom Volumetric Table)

A selection of Gallons (factory default Volume unit), Milliliters, Liters, Cubic


Volume Units
Feet, or Cubic Inches, is provided.

Vessel Type Select Custom Table if none of the nine Vessel types can be used.
The Custom table points can be a Linear (straight line between adjacent points) or
Cust Table Type Spline (can be a curved line between points) relationship. See below drawing for
more information.
A maximum of 30 points can be used in building the Custom table. Each pair of
values will have a level (height) in the units chosen in the Level units screen, and
the associated volume for that level point. The values must be monotonic, i.e.
Cust Table Vals
each pair of values must be greater than the previous level/volume pair. The last
pair of values should have the highest level value and volume value associated
with the level in the vessel.

P9
P8
P2

Transition P7
point P6
P5

P4

P3
P1 P2

P1 Use where walls are not perpendicular to base.


Concentrate at least two points at beginning (P1) and end (P9);
and three points at either side of transition points.

LINEAR SPLINE

60 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.4.5 Open Channel Flow Capability
Selecting Measurement Type = Flow allows the Model 706
transmitter to measure flow as the Primary Measured Value.
Model 706
Open channel flow is performed by using the ECLIPSE
Flow Model 706 to measure the Head in a hydraulic structure.
The hydraulic structure is the primary measuring element,
of which the two most common types are weirs and flumes.
Since the primary element has a defined shape and dimen-
sions, the rate of flow through the flume or over the weir is
related to the Head at a specified measurement location.
Parshall
Flume The ECLIPSE Model 706 is the secondary measuring
device, which measures the Head of the liquid in the flume
or weir. Open channel flow equations stored in the trans-
mitter firmware convert the measured Head into units of
flow (volume/time).
Open Channel Flow Measurement
Parshall Flume
NOTE: Proper positioning of the Model 706 should be per the recom-
mendation of the flume or weir manufacturer.

Model
706

Blocking Distance
10" (250 mm) min.
Reference
Distance

Water Surface
Throat Section

Head
Flow

Flume (side view)

Model
706
10" (250 mm)
minimum
Distance
Blocking

Reference
Distance
Water Surface Crest

Head

Weir Plate

Channel Floor

Weir (side view)

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 61


3.4.5.1 Configuration using Flume/Weir Equations
The following table provides an explanation of each of the
System Configuration parameters required for open channel
flow applications using one of the Flow Elements that are
stored in the firmware.

Configuration Parameter Explanation


A selection of Gallons/Minute (factory default Flow unit), Gallons/Hour, Mil
Flow Units Gallons/Day, Liters/Second, Liters/Minute, Liters/Hour, Cubic Meter/Hour,
Cubic Ft/Second, Cubic Ft/Minute, and Cubic Ft/Hour are provided.

Select one of the following primary Flow Elements that are stored in the firmware:
Parshall flume sizes of 1", 2", 3", 6", 9", 12", 18", 24", 36", 48", 60", 72", 96",
120" and 144". Palmer-Bwls (Palmer-Bowlus) flume sizes of 4", 6", 8", 10", 12",
15", 18", 21", 24", 27" and 30". V-notch weir sizes of 22.5O, 30O, 45O, 60O, 90O and
Flow Element 120O. Rect with Ends (Rectangular Weir with End Contractions), Rect w/o Ends
(Rectangular Weir without End Contractions), and Cipoletti weir. Custom Table (see
page 65 can be selected if none of the stored Flow Elements can be used. The
table can be built with a maximum of 30 points. The Model 706 also has the capa-
bility of using a Generic Equation (see page 26) for flow calculation.

The Weir Crest Length screen only appears when the chosen Flow Element is
Weir Crest Length Cipoletti or one of the Rectangular weirs. Input this length in the user-selected
level units.

Flume Channel Width Allows for entry of the width of the palmer bowlus flume.

Only appears when flow element is V-Notch weir. It allows for the entry of angle of
V-Notch Weir Angle
the V-Notch weir.
The Reference Distance is measured from the sensor reference point to the point
Reference Dist of zero flow in the weir or flume. This must be measured very accurately in the
user-selected level units.
Maximum Head is the highest liquid level (Head) value in the flume or weir before
the flow equation is no longer valid. The Maximum Head is expressed in the user-
Maximum Head selected Level units. The Model 706 will default to the largest Maximum Head value
that is allowed for any given flume or weir. The Maximum Head value can be revised
depending on the value of the Reference Distance, or for end user preference.
Maximum Flow is a read-only value that represents the flow value corresponding
Maximum Flow
to the Maximum Head value for the flume or weir.
The Low Flow Cutoff (in user-selected level units) will force the calculated flow
Low Flow Cutoff value to zero whenever the Head is below this point. This parameter will have a
default and minimum value of zero.

62 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.4.5.2 Configuration using Generic Equation
The following table provides an explanation of each of the
System Configuration parameters for Open channel flow
applications using the Generic Equation.
Configuration Parameter Explanation (Open Channel Flow — using the Generic Equation)
A selection of Gallons/Minute (factory default Flow unit), Gallons/Hour,
Flow Units Mil Gallons/Day, Liters/Second, Liters/Minute, Liters/Hour, Cubic Meter/Hour,
Cubic Ft/Second, Cubic Ft/Minute, and Cubic Ft/Hour are provided.
Select one of the following primary Flow Elements that are stored in the firmware:
Parshall flume sizes of 1", 2", 3", 6", 9", 12", 18", 24", 36", 48", 60", 72", 96",
120" and 144". Palmer-Bwls (Palmer-Bowlus) flume sizes of 4", 6", 8", 10", 12",
15", 18", 21", 24", 27" and 30". V-notch weir sizes of 22.5O, 30O, 45O, 60O, 90O and
Flow Element 120O. Rect with Ends (Rectangular Weir with End Contractions), Rect w/o Ends
(Rectangular Weir without End Contractions), and Cipoletti weir. Custom Table (see
page 65 can be selected if none of the stored Flow Elements can be used. The
table can be built with a maximum of 30 points. The Model 706 also has the capa-
bility of using a Generic Equation (see page 26) for flow calculation.
Generic Equation is a discharge flow equation in the form of Q = K(L-CH)Hn, where
Q = flow (Cu Ft/Second), H = Head (Feet), K = a constant, and L, C and n are user
input factors that depend on which Flow Element is being used. Make sure the flow
equation is in the form of Q = K(L-CH)Hn, and proceed to enter the values of K,L,C,H
Generic Eqn Factors
and n. See example below.
NOTE: The Generic Equation parameters must be entered in Cu Ft/Second
units. The resultant flow is converted by the Model 706 into whatever Flow Units
are selected above. See example below.
The Reference Distance is measured from the sensor reference point to the point
Reference Dist of zero flow in the weir or flume. This must be measured very accurately in the
user-selected level units.
Maximum Head is the highest liquid level (Head) value in the flume or weir before
the flow equation is no longer valid. The Maximum Head is expressed in the user-
Maximum Head selected level units. The Model 706 will default to the largest Maximum Head value
that is allowed for any given flume or weir. The Maximum Head value can be revised
depending on the value of the Reference Distance, or for end user preference.
Maximum Flow is a read-only value that represents the flow value corresponding
Maximum Flow
to the Maximum Head value for the flume or weir.
The Low Flow Cutoff (in user-selected level units) will force the calculated flow
Low Flow Cutoff value to zero whenever the Head is below this point. This parameter will have a
default and minimum value of zero.

Generic Equation Example (using equation for an 8' rectangular weir w/ end contractions)
Q = Cubic Ft/Second flow rate L = 8' (weir crest length in feet) H = Head value
K = 3.33 for Cubic Ft/Second units C = 0.2 (constant) n = 1.5 as an exponent

Using the factors above the equation becomes:


Q = 3.33 (8-0.2H) H1.5
n
Q = K(L-CH)H The discharge flow value for a Head value of three feet
becomes 128.04 Cubic Ft/Second. If GPM was selected for
the Flow Units, the Model 706 Measured Values screen would
display this value converted to 57,490 GPM.
57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 63
3.4.5.3 Configuration using Custom Table
Concentrate points as follows:
A. At least two points at beginning (P1 and P2); The following table provides an explanation of each of the
B. At least two points at end (P9 and P10);
C. Three points at approximate average flow rate (for
System Configuration parameters for open channel flow
example, P3, P4, P5); and at transition point (P7) applications using the Custom Table.
and points on either side (P6, P8).

Transition P10
point

P9

P7
P8
P6 P5
P5
P4 Average flow rate
P3
P4

P2
P1 P3
SPLINE OR LINEAR
P2
SPLINE Concentrate points along curve P1

Configuration Parameter Explanation (Open Channel Flow — Custom Table)


A selection of Gallons/Minute (factory default Flow unit), Gallons/Hour,
Flow Units Mil Gallons/Day, Liters/Second, Liters/Minute, Liters/Hour, Cubic Meters/Hour,
Cubic Ft/Second, Cubic Ft/Minute, and Cubic Ft/Hour are provided.
Select one of the following primary Flow Elements that are stored in the firmware:
Parshall flume sizes of 1", 2", 3", 6", 9", 12", 18", 24", 36", 48", 60", 72", 96",
120" and 144". Palmer-Bwls (Palmer-Bowlus) flume sizes of 4", 6", 8", 10", 12",
15", 18", 21", 24", 27" and 30". V-notch weir sizes of 22.5O, 30O, 45O, 60O, 90O and
Flow Element 120O. Rect with Ends (Rectangular Weir with End Contractions), Rect w/o Ends
(Rectangular Weir without End Contractions), and Cipoletti weir. Custom Table (see
page 65 can be selected if none of the stored Flow Elements can be used. The
table can be built with a maximum of 30 points. The Model 706 also has the capa-
bility of using a Generic Equation (see page 66) for flow calculation.
The Custom table points can be a Linear (straight line between adjacent points) or
Custom Table Spline (can be a curved line between points) relationship. Refer to the drawing
above for more information.
A maximum of 30 points can be used in building the Custom table. Each pair of val-
ues will have a Head (height) in the units chosen in the Level units screen, and the
associated flow for that Head value. The values must be monotonic, i.e., each pair
Cust Table Vals
of values must be greater than the previous Head/flow pair. The last pair of values
should have the highest Head value (usually the Maximum Head value) and the flow
associated with that Head value.
The Reference Distance is measured from the sensor reference point to the point
Reference Dist of zero flow in the weir or flume. This must be measured very accurately in the
user-selected level units.
Maximum Head is the highest liquid level (Head) value in the flume or weir before
the flow equation is no longer valid. The Maximum Head is expressed in the user-
Maximum Head selected Level units. The Model 706 will default to the largest Maximum Head value
that is allowed for any given flume or weir. The Maximum Head value can be revised
depending on the value of the Reference Distance, or for end user preference.
Maximum Flow is a read-only value that represents the flow value corresponding
Maximum Flow
to the Maximum Head value for the flume or weir.
The Low Flow Cutoff (in user-selected level units) will force the calculated flow
Low Flow Cutoff value to zero whenever the Head is below this point. This parameter will have a
default and minimum value of zero.

64 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.4.6 Reset Function
A parameter labeled “Reset Parameter” is located at the end
of the DEVICE SETUP/ADVANCED CONFIG menu.
In the event a user gets confused during configuration or
advanced troubleshooting, this parameter gives the user the
ability to reset the Model 706 transmitter configuration.
Unique to the Model 706 transmitter is the ability for
MAGNETROL to fully “pre-configure” devices to customer
requests. For that reason, the Reset function will return the
device back to the state at which it left the factory.
It is recommended that MAGNETROL Technical Support
be contacted as the Advanced User password will be
required for this reset.

3.4.7 Additional Diagnostic/Troubleshooting Capabilities

3.4.7.1 Event History


As a means for improved troubleshooting capability, a
record of significant diagnostic events is stored with time
and date stamps. A real time on board clock (which must be
set by the operator), will maintain the current time.

3.4.7.2 Context-sensitive Help


Descriptive information relevant to the highlighted parameter
in the menu will be accessible via the local display and
remote host interfaces. This will most often be a parameter-
related screen, but could also be information about menus,
actions (for example, Loop [Analog Output] Test, resets of
various types), diagnostic indicators, etc.
For example: Dielectric Range — Selects the range bounding
the dielectric constant of the medium in vessel. For interface
measurement mode, it selects the range bounding the
dielectric constant of the lower liquid medium. Some ranges
may not be selectable depending on the probe model.

3.4.7.3 Trend Data


Another new feature to the Model 706 is the ability to log
several measured values (selectable from any of the
primary, secondary, or supplemental measured values) at a
configurable rate (for example, once every five minutes) for
a period ranging from several hours to a number of days
(depending on the configured sample rate and number of
values to be recorded). The data will be stored in non-
volatile memory in the transmitter with date and time
information for subsequent retrieval and visualization using
the associated Model 706 DTM.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 65


3.5 Agency Approvals

These units are in compliance with the EMC-directive 2014/30/EU,


the PED-directive 2014/68/EU and the ATEX directive 2014/34/EU.

Explosion Proof (with intrinsically Safe Probe) Non- Incendive


US/Canada: US/Canada:
Class I, Div 1, Group B, C and D, T4 Class I, II, III, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D, E, F, G, T4
Class I, Zone 1 AEx d/ia [ia IIC Ga] IIB + H2 T4 Gb/Ga Class I, Zone 2 AEx ia/nA [ia Ga] IIC T4 Ga/Gc
Class I, Zone 1 Ex d/ia [ia IIC Ga] IIB + H2 T4 Gb/Ga Class I, Zone 2 Ex ia/nA [ia Ga] IIC T4 Ga/Gc
Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC
Type 4X, IP67 Type 4X, IP67

Flame Proof ATEX – FM14ATEX0042X:


ATEX – FM14ATEX0041X: II 1/3 G Ex ia/nA [ia Ga] IIC T4 Ga/Gc
II 2/1 G Ex d/ia [ia IIC Ga] IIB + H2 T6 to T1 Gb/Ga Ta = -15ºC to +70ºC
Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC IP67
IP67
IEC – IECEx FMG 14.00018X:
IEC- IECEx FMG 14.0018X: Ex ia/nA [ia Ga] IIC T4 Ga/Gc
Ex d/ia [ia IIC Ga] IIB + H2 T6 to T1 Gb/Ga Ta = -15ºC to + 70ºC
Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC IP66/67
IP66/67

Intrinsically Safe Dust Ignition Proof


US/Canada: US/Canada:
Class I, II, III, Div 1, Group A, B, C, D, E, F, G, T4, Class II, III, Division 1, Group E, F and G, T4
Class I, Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T4 Ga Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC
Class I, Zone 0 Ex ia IIC T4 Ga Type 4X, IP67
Ta =-40ºC to + 70ºC
Type 4X, IP67 ATEX – FM14ATEX0041X:
II 1/2 D Ex ia/tb [ia Da] IIIC T85ºC to T450ºC Da/Db
ATEX – FM14ATEX0041X: Ta = -15ºC to +70ºC
II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga IP67
Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC
IP67 IEC – IECEx FMG 14.0018X:
Ex ia tb [ia Da] IIIC T75ºC to T435ºC Db
IEC – IECEx FMG 14.0018X: Ex ia IIIC T75ºC to T435ºC Da
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga Ta = -15ºC to +70ºC
Ta = -40ºC to +70ºC IP66/67
IP66/67

The following approval standards are applicable:


FM3600:2011, FM3610:2010, FM3611:2004, FM3615:2006, FM3616:2011, FM3810:2005, ANSI/ISA60079-0:2013,
ANSI/ISA 60079-1:2009, ANSI/ISA 60079-11:2013, ANSI/ISA 60079-15:2012, ANSI/ISA 60079-26:2011, NEMA 250:2003,
ANSI/IEC 60529:2004, C22.2 No. 0.4:2009, C22.2 No. 0.5:2008, C22.2 No. 30:2007, C22.2 No. 94:2001, C22.2 No. 157:2012,
C22.2 No. 213:2012, C22.2 No. 1010.1:2009, CAN/CSA 60079-0:2011, CAN/CSA 60079-1:2011, CAN/CSA 60079-11:2011,
CAN/CSA 60079-15:2012, C22.2 No. 60529:2005, EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-1:2007, EN60079-11:2012, EN60079-15:2010,
EN60079-26:2007, EN60079-31:2009, EN60529+A1:1991-2000, IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-1:2007, IEC60079-11:2011,
IEC60079-15:2010, IEC60079-26:2006, IEC60079-31:2008

66 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.5.1 Special Conditions of Use
1. The enclosure contains aluminum and is considered to present a potential risk of ignition by impact or
friction. Care must be taken during installation and use to prevent impact or friction.
2. The risk of electrostatic discharge shall be minimized at installation, following the directions given in the
instructions.
3. Contact the original manufacturer for information on the dimensions of the flameproof joints.
4. For installation with ambient temperature of +70 °C, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for guidance
on proper selection of conductors.
5. WARNING—Explosion Hazard: Do not disconnect equipment when flammable or combustible atmoshpere
is present.
6. For IEC and ATEX: To maintain the T1 to T6 temperature codes, care shall be taken to ensure the enclo-
sure temperature does not exceed +70 °C.
7. For U.S. and Canada: To maintain the T4 temperature code, care shall be taken to ensure the enclosure
temperature does not exceed +70 °C.
8. Temperature codes for the ratings Ex d/ia [ia IIC] IIB+H2 and Ex ia/tb [ia] IIIC are defined by the following
table:
Temperature Code-TCG Temperature Code-TCD
Process Temperature (PT) (GAS) (Dust)

Up to 75 °C T6 TCD= PT+10K=85 °C

From 75 to 90 °C T5 TCD= PT+10K=100 °C

From 90 to 120 °C T4 TCD= PT+15K=135 °C

From 125 to 185 °C T3 TCD= PT+15K=200 °C

From 185 to 285 °C T2 TCD= PT+15K=300 °C

From 285 to 435 °C T1 TCD= PT+15K=450 °C

3.5.2 Agency Specifications – Explosion Proof Installation


Factory Sealed: This product has been approved by Factory Mutual Research (FM) as a Factory Sealed device.
NOTE: Factory Sealed: No Explosion Proof conduit fitting (EY seal) is required within 18" of the transmitter. However, an
Explosion Proof conduit fitting (EY seal) is required between the hazardous and safe areas.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 67


3.5.3 Agency Specifications – FM/CSA Intrinsically Safe Installation

68 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.5.4 Agency Specifications – FM/CSA Intrinsically Safe FoundAtIon™ fieldbus Installation

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 69


3.6 Specifications

3.6.1 Functional/Physical
System Design
Measurement Principle Guided Wave Radar based on Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR)
Input
Measured Variable Level, as determined by GWR time of flight
Span 6 inches to 100 feet (15 cm to 30 m); Model 7yS Probe 20 feet (610 cm) max.
Output
Type 4 to 20 mA with HART: 3.8 mA to 20.5 mA useable (per NAMUR NE43)
FOUNDATION fieldbus™: H1 (ITK Ver. 6.2.0)
PROFIBUS PA
Modbus
Resolution Analog: .003 mA
Digital Display: 1 mm
Loop Resistance 591 ohms @ 24 VDC and 22 mA
Diagnostic Alarm Selectable: 3.6 mA, 22 mA (meets requirements of NAMUR NE 43), or HOLD last output
Diagnostic Indication Meets requirements of NAMUR NE107
Damping Adjustable 0 –10 seconds
User Interface
Keypad 4-button menu-driven data entry
Display Graphic liquid crystal display
Digital Communication/Systems HART Version 7—with Field Communicator, AMS, or FDT
DTM (PACTware™), EDDL
FOUNDATION fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA or Modbus
Menu Languages Transmitter LCD: English, French, German, Spanish, Russian
HART DD: English, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Chinese, Portuguese
FOUNDATION fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA and Modbus Host System: English
Power (at transmitter terminals) HART: General Purpose (Weatherproof)/Intrinsically Safe/Explosion-proof:
16 to 36 VDC
11 VDC minimum under certain conditions
FOUNDATION fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA: 9 to 17.5 VDC
FISCO ia / FNICO ic, Explosion Proof, General Purpose and Weatherproof
Modbus: 8 to 30 VDC
Explosion Proof, General Purpose, and Weatherproof
Housing
Material IP67/die-cast aluminum A413 (<0.6% copper); optional stainless steel
Net/Gross Weight Aluminum: 4.5 lbs. (2.0 kg)
Stainless Steel: 10.0 lbs. (4.50 kg)
Overall Dimensions H 8.34" (212 mm) x W 4.03" (102 mm) x D 7.56" (192 mm)
Cable Entry ⁄2" NPT or M20
1

SIL 2/3 Capable (Certified) Safe Failure Fraction = 93% (HART only)
Functional Safety to SIL 2/3 in accordance with IEC 61508

70 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.6.1 Functional/Physical
Environment
Operating Temperature -40 to +175 °F (-40 to +80 °C); LCD viewable -5 to +160 °F (-20 to +70 °C)
Storage Temperature -50 to +185 °F (-45 to +85 °C)
Humidity 0 to 99%, non-condensing
Electromagnetic Compatibility Meets CE requirement (EN 61326) and NAMUR NE 21 ¿
Surge Protection Meets CE EN 61326 (1000V)
Shock/Vibration ANSI/ISA-S71.03 Class SA1 (Shock); ANSI/ISA-S71.03 Class VC2 (Vibration)
Performance
Reference Conditions ¡ Reflection from liquid, with dielectric constant in center of selected range,
with a 72" (1.8 m) coaxial probe at +70 °F (+20 °C), in Auto Threshold Mode
Linearity ¬ Coaxial/Caged Probes: <0.1% of probe length or 0.1 inch (2.5 mm), whichever is greater
Single Rod in Tanks/Twin Cable: <0.3% of probe length or 0.3 inch (7.5 mm), whichever is greater
Accuracy √ Coaxial/Caged Probes: ±0.1% of probe length or ±0.1 inch (2.5 mm), whichever is greater
Single Rod in Tanks/Twin Cable: ±0.5% of probe length or ±0.5 inch (13 mm), whichever is greater
Interface Operation: Coaxial/Caged probes: ±1 inch (25 mm) for an interface thickness greater than
2 inches (50 mm)
Twin Flexible probes: ±2 inch (50 mm) for an interface thickness greater than
8 inches (200 mm)
Resolution ±0.1 inch or 1 mm
Repeatability <0.1 inch (2.5 mm)
Hysteresis <0.1 inch (2.5 mm)
Response Time Approximately 1 second
Initialization Time Less than 10 seconds
Ambient Temperature Effect Approx. ±0.02% of probe length/degree C (for probes greater than 8 feet (2.5 m))
Process Dielectric <0.3 inch (7.5 mm) within selected range
FOUNDATION fieldbus™
ITK Version 6.2.0
H1 Device Class Link Master (LAS) — selectable ON/OFF
Function Blocks (8) Al, (3) Transducer, (1) Resource, (1) Arithmetic, (1) Input Selector,
(1) Signal Characterizer, (2) PID, (1) Integrator
Quiescent Current 15 mA
Execution Time 15 ms (40 ms PID Block)
Device Revision 02
DD Version 0x01
PROFIBUS PA
Device Revision 0x101A
Digital Communication Protocol Version 3.02 MBP (31.25 kbits/sec)
Function Blocks (1) ¥ Physical Block, (8) ¥ AI Blocks, (3) ¥ Transducer Blocks
Quiescent Current 15 mA

¿ Single rod and twin cable probes must


Execution Time 15 ms
Modbus be used in metallic vessel or stillwell to
maintain CE noise immunity
Power Consumption <0.5W ¡ Specifications will degrade in Fixed
Threshold mode.
Signal Wiring Two-wire half duplex RS-485 Modbus ¬ Linearity in top 18 inches (46 cm) of
twin cable and single rod probes in
Ground (common mode) Voltage ±7V tanks will be application dependent.
√ Accuracy may degrade when using
Bus Termination Per EIA-485 manual or automatic compensation.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 71


3.6.2 O-ring (Seal) Selection Chart

“O”-Ring Max. Process Min. Process Max. Process Not Recommended For
Code Recommended for Applications
Material Temperature Temperature Pressure Applications

Ketones (MEK, acetone),


skydrol fluids, amines,
1000 psi 70 °F anhydrous ammonia, low
400 °F @ 230 psi -40 °F
0 Viton® GFLT (200 °C @ 16 bar) (-40 °C)
(70 bar @ molecular weight esters and General purpose, ethylene
20 °C) ethers, hot hydrofluoric or
chlorosulfuric acids,
sour HCs
1000 psi 70 °F Petroleum oils, di-ester base
250 °F @ 200 psi -60 °F
1 EPDM (120 °C @14 bar) (-50 °C)
(70 bar @ Acetone, MEK, skydrol fluids
lubricant, steam
20 °C)
Inorganic and organic acids (including
1000 psi 70 °F Hot water/steam, hot
400 °F @ 232 psi -40 °F hydro fluids and nitric), aldehydes,
2 Kalrez 4079
®
(200 °C @ 16 bar) (-40 °C)
(70 bar @ aliphatic amines, ethylene
ethylene, organic oils, glycols, silicone
20 °C) oxide, propylene oxide
oils, vinegar, sour HCs

Halogenated HCs, nitro HCs,


phosphate ester hydraulic
HSN 1000 psi 70 °F
275 °F @ 320 psi -4 °F fluids, ketones (MEK,
3 (Highly Saturated (135 °C @ 22 bar) (70 bar @ NACE applications
(-20 °C) acetone), strong acids,
Nitrile) 20 °C)
ozone, automotive brake
fluid, steam

Halogenated HCs, nitro HCs,


General purpose sealing,
phosphate ester hydraulic
1000 psi 70 °F petroleum oils and fluids, cold
275 °F @ 320 psi -4 °F fluids, ketones (MEK,
4 Buna-N (135 °C @ 22 bar) (-20 °C)
(70 bar @ water, silicone greases and oils,
acetone), strong acids,
20 °C) di-ester base lubricants, ethylene
ozone, automotive brake
glycol base fluids
fluid

1000 psi 70 °F Refrigerants, high anline point


250 °F @ 290 psi -65 °F Phosphate ester fluids,
5 Neoprene® (120 °C @ 20 bar) (-55 °C)
(70 bar @ petroleum oils, silicate ester
ketones (MEK, acetone)
20 °C) lubricants
Acetaldehyde, ammonia +
1000 psi 70 °F lithium metal solution, Inorganic and organic acids,
400 °F @ 200 psi -20 °F
6 Chemraz® 505 (200 °C @ 14 bar) (-30 °C)
(70 bar @ butyraldehyde, di-water, alkalines, ketones, esters,
20 °C) freon, ethylene oxide, liquors, aldehydes, fuels
isobutyraldehyde
1000 psi 70 °F
200 °F @ 420 psi -65 °F Acids, Ketones, Hydraulic systems, petroleum oils,
7 Polyurethane (95 °C @29 bar) (-55 °C)
(70 bar @
chlorinated HCs, HC fuel, oxygen, ozone
20 °C)
Inorganic and organic acids
Simriz Sz485 Black liquor, freon 43, (including hydro fluids and nitric),
1000 psi 70 °F
(formerly 400 °F @ 232 psi -4 °F freon 75, galden, KEL-F aldehydes, ethylene, organic oils,
8 (70 bar @
Aegis PF128) (200 °C @ 16 bar) (-20 °C) liquid, molten potassium, glycols, silicone oils, vinegar, sour
¿
20 °C)
molten sodium HCs, steam, amines, ethylene oxide,
propylene oxide, NACE applications

Inorganic and organic acids (including


1000 psi 70 °F Hot water/steam, hot
400 °F @ 232 psi -40 °F hydro fluids and nitric), aldehydes,
A Kalrez 6375
®
(200 °C @ 16 bar) (-40 °C)
(70 bar @ aliphatic amines, ethylene
ethylene, organic oils, glycols,
20 °C) oxide, propylene oxide
silicone oils, vinegar, sour HCs

1000 psi 70 °F Hot water/steam, hot


400 °F @ 232 psi -40 °F
B Kalrez® 6375 (200 °C @ 16 bar) (-40 °C)
(70 bar @ aliphatic amines, ethylene Hydrofluoric Acid
20 °C) oxide, propylene oxide

Hot alkaline solutions HF acid, General high temperature/high


6250 psi 70 °F
D or Glass Ceramic 850 °F @ 3600 psi -320 °F media with ph>12, pressure applications,
(431 bar @
N Alloy (450 °C @ 248 bar) (-195 °C)
20 °C) direct exposure to hydrocarbons, full vacuum
saturated steam (hermetic), ammonia, chlorine

¿ Maximum +300 °F (+150 °C) for use on steam.

72 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.6.3 Probe Selection Guide
COAXIAL/CAGED GWR PROBE TWIN CABLE GWR PROBE SINGLE ROD/CABLE PROBE

signal propagation signal propagation signal propagation

Launch

end view

Vacuum ƒ
GWR Dielectric Temperature
end view Max. Overfill Viscosity
Range ¡¬ Range √
Description Application Installation
Probe¿ Pressure Safe cP (mPa.s)
Coaxial GWR Probes— Liquids
Standard Level/Interface Tank/Chamber ε 1.4 –100 -40 to +400 °F 1000 psi
7yT r Yes Yes 500/2000
Temperature (-40 to +200 °C) (70 bar)
High -320 to +400 °F
ε 1.4 –100 (-196 6250 psi
7yP Pressure Level/Interface Tank/Chamber r Full Yes 500/2000
to +200 °C) (431 bar)
High Temp./ Level/Interface Tank/Chamber ε 1.4 –100 -320 to +850 °F 6250 psi
7yD r Full Yes 500/2000
High Press. (-196 to +450 °C) (431 bar)
7yS Steam Saturated Tank/Chamber εr 10 –100 -40 to +800 °F ≈ 3000 psi Full No ∆ 500
Probe Steam (-40 to +425 °C) (207 bar)

Caged GWR Probes— Liquids


Standard -40 to +400 °F
εr 1.4 –100 (-40 1000 psi
7yG Temperature Level/Interface Chamber Yes Yes 10000
to +200 °C) (70 bar)
High εr 1.4 –100 (-196 toto +200
-320 +400 °F 6250 psi
7yL Pressure Level/Interface Chamber Full Yes 10000
°C) (431 bar)
High Temp./ Level/Interface -320 to +850 °F
εr 1.4 –100 (-196 to +450 °C) 6250 psi
7yJ Chamber Full Yes 10000
High Press. (431 bar)

Single Rod Rigid GWR Probes— Liquids


7yF Standard Level Tank -40 to +400 °F
εr 1.7–100 (-40 1000 psi Yes No « 10000
Temperature to +200 °C) (70 bar)
7yM High Level Tank -320 to +400 °F 6250 psi
εr 1.7–100 (-196 Full No « 10000
Pressure to +200 °C) (431 bar)
7yN High Temp./ Level Tank +850 °F 6250 psi
εr 1.7–100 (-196 toto +450
-320 Full No « 10000
High Press. °C) (431 bar)

Single Cable Flexible GWR Probes— Liquids


Standard
7y1 Temperature Level Tank -40 to +400 °F
εr 1.7–100 (-40 1000 psi Yes No « 10000
to +200 °C) (70 bar)
7y3 High Level Tank -320 to +400 °F 6250 psi
εr 1.7–100 (-196 Full No « 10000
Pressure to +200 °C) (431 bar)
7y4 ➈ Standard -40 to +400 °F
εr 1.4 –100 (-40 to +200 1000 psi No «
Temperature Level/Interface Chamber Yes 10000
°C) (70 bar)
7y6 High Temp./ -320 to +850 °F 6250 psi
εr 1.4 –100 (-196 No «
High Press Level/Interface Chamber Full 10000
to +450 °C) (431 bar)

Twin Cable Flexible GWR Probes— Liquids


7y7 Standard -40 to +400 °F
εr 1.7–100 (-40 1000 psi No «
Temperature Level/Interface Tank Yes 1500
to +200 °C) (70 bar)

Single Cable Flexible GWR Probes— Solids


7y2 Bulk Solids Level Tank -40 to +150 °F
εr 4 –100 (-40 Atmos. No No « 10000
Probe to +65 °C)

Twin Cable Flexible GWR Probes— Solids


7y5 Bulk Solids Level Tank -40 to +150 °F
εr 1.7–100 (-40 Atmos. No No « 1500
Probe to +65 °C)
¿ 2nd digit A=English, C=Metric ≈ When installed in side-mounted chamber.
¡ Minimum εr 1.2 with end of probe analysis enabled. ∆ Consult factory for overfill applications
¬ Single rod probes mounted directly into the vessel must be within 3 – 6 inches « Overfill capability can be achieved with software.
ε
of metal tank wall to obtain minimum dielectric of 1.4, otherwise r min = 1.7. ➈ Scheduled for future release.
√ Depends on the probe spacer material. Refer to Model Selection for spacer
options.
ƒ ECLIPSE probes containing o-rings can be used for vacuum (negative pres-
sure) service, but only those probes with glass seals are hermetically sealed
to <10-8 cc/sec @ 1 atmosphere helium.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 73


3.6.4 Probe Specifications

Dual-element Probes
Coaxial / Cage HP Coaxial/Cage HTHP Coaxial/Cage Steam Flexible Twin Rod
(7yL, 7yP) ¿ (7yD, 7yJ) ¿ (7yS) ¿
Model
(7yG, 7yT) (7y5, 7y7)
316/316L SS (Hastelloy 316/316L SS, 316/316L SS,
316/316L SS, 316/316L SS
C and Monel opt.) Glass Ceramic Alloy, Glass Ceramic Alloy,
Materials Peek™, Inconel FEP Coating
TFE spacers, Inconel Inconel
Aegis PF 128 O-ring Viton® O-rings
Viton® O-rings TFE spacers TFE or Peek™ spacers
Small and Medium Coaxial: .3125" (8 mm) diameter rod, .875" (10 mm) .875" (10 mm) +575 °F
diameter tube 1.25" (32 mm) +800 °F
Two .25" (6 mm) dia.
Diameter Enlarged Coaxial: .6" (15 mm) dia. rod, 1.75" (44 mm) dia. tube 1.62 (42 mm) cables; .875" (22 mm)
CL to CL

Caged: 0.5" – 1.50" (13 – 38 mm) dia. rod N/A

Process 3
⁄4" NPT, 1" BSP 3
⁄4" NPT, 1" BSP 3
⁄4" NPT, 1" BSP 2" NPT
Connection ASME or DIN flanges ASME or DIN flanges ASME or DIN flanges ASME or DIN flanges

Transition zone 8" (200 mm) @


None 18" (457 mm)
(Top) εr = 80

Transition zone 6" (150 mm) @ εr = 1.4 6" (150 mm) @ εr = 1.4
1" (25 mm)@ εr = 80 12" (305 mm)
(Bottom) 1" (25 mm) @ εr = 80.0 1" (25 mm) @ εr = 80.0

7y5: 3000 lbs. (1360Kg)


Pull Force/Tension N/A
7y7: 100 lbs. (45Kg)

NOTE: Transition Zone is dielectric dependent; εr = dielectric permittivity. The transmitter still operates but
level reading may become nonlinear in Transition Zone.

Single Rod Probes

Model 7yF 7yM, 7yN ¿ 7y1 Flexible 7y3, 7y6 Flexible ¿ 7y2 Flexible

316/316L SS 316/316L SS, Inconel


316/316L SS, 316/316L SS,
(Hastelloy® C and (Hastelloy® C and 316/316L SS,
Materials Viton® O-rings Inconel,
Monel optional) Monel optional) Viton® O-rings
(optional PFA coating) Viton® O-rings
Viton®/PEEK™ O-rings Viton®/PEEK™ O-rings

Diameter 0.5" (13 mm) 0.25" (6 mm)

Blocking Distance - Top 0–36" (0–91 cm)–Installation dependent (adjustable)

Process 1" NPT (7yF) 2" NPT


Connection ASME or DIN flange ASME or DIN flange
Transition zone
Application Dependent
(Top)
Transition zone
2" (5 mm) @ εr >10 12" (305 mm) minimum
(Bottom)

Pull Force/Tension N/A 20 lbs. (9 Kg) 3000 lbs. (1360 Kg)

Not more than 3" (7.6 cm) deflection at


Side Load end of 120" (305 cm) probe
Cable not to exceed 5° from vertical

¿ Probes of Hastelloy C contain an Inconel 625 to Hastelloy C seal weld.

74 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


Temperature/Pressure Charts
7yL, 7yM and 7yP 7yD, 7yJ, 7yN, 7y3 and 7y6
Temperature/Pressure Ratings Temperature/Pressure Ratings
6500 6500

6000 6000
Maximum Pressure (PSI)

Maximum Pressure (PSI)


5500 5500

5000 5000

4500 4500

4000 4000

3500 3500

3000 3000
0 100 200 300 400 500 0 200 400 600 800 1000
Temperature (°F) Temperature (°F)
316/316L SST 316/316L SST
Hastelloy C276 Hastelloy C276
Monel 400 Monel 400
High Pressure Probes Low Pressure High Pressure Probes Low Pressure
NOTES: Temp. SST Hastelloy Monel All Materials Temp. SST Hastelloy Monel All Materials
• 7yS steam probes are rated to 3000 psi (207 bar) up to +750 °F (+400 °C) -40 6000 6250 5000 750 +600 3760 5040 3940 —
• 7y3, 7y6 flexible probes: Pressure is limited by the chamber +70 6000 6250 5000 1000 +650 3680 4905 3940 —
• 7y2, 7y5 bulk solids probes: 50 psi (3.45 bar) to +150 °F (+65 °C) +100 6000 6250 5000 1000 +700 3620 4730 3920 —
• High pressure probes with threaded fittings are rated as follows: +200 5160 6250 4380 650 +750 3560 4430 3880 —
• 7yD, 7yN, 7yP and 7y3 probes with threaded fittings have 3600 psi (248 bar)
+300 4660 6070 4080 400 +800 3520 4230 3820 —
• rating. 7yM probes with threaded fittings have 2016 psi (139 bar) rating.
+400 4280 5820 3940 270 +850 3480 4060 3145 —
+500 3980 5540 3940 —
3.6.5 Physical Specifications – Transmitter
inches (mm)
3.38 4.18
(86) (106)

3.77
3.38 4.18 8.34
(96)
(86) (106) (212)
5.09
9.30 (129)
(236) 3.77
(96)

4.03
45° (102)
2 cable
entries
2 cable Eclipse® Housing
entries
Integral Electronics (45° View)
2.75
Eclipse® Housing (70) 45° 33 or 144
(838 or 3650)
(45° View)
3.00 3.75
2.00 (76) (95)
(51)

3.50 2 Holes
(89) .38 (10) Dia. 5.00
(125)

Eclipse® Remote Configurations

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 75


3.6.6 Physical Specifications – Coaxial Probes
inches (mm)
3.38 4.18 3.38 4.18 3.38 4.18
(86) (106) (86) (106) (86) (106)

3.77 3.77 3.77


(96) (96) (96)

9.30 9.30 9.30


(236) (236) (236)
2 cable
entries

Optional 45° 2 cable 45° 2 cable 45°


Flushing Port entries entries
1/4" NPT

4.46
(113) Optional
3.0 (76 mm) Flushing Port Optional
typical 1/4" NPT 7.76 Flushing Port
(197) 1/4" NPT
10.45
Mounting 3.0 (76 mm) (265)
Flange typical
3.0 (76 mm)
typical
Probe
Mounting
Insertion
Flange
Length
Probe
Insertion Mounting
Length Flange Probe
Insertion
Length

Model 7yT Model 7yP Model 7yD


with flanged connection with flanged connection with flanged connection
3.38 4.18
(86) (106)

3.77 A
(96)
C
9.30
(236) B E

2 cable 45°
F
entries
D
Coaxial GWR Probe,
End View Coaxial Probe Slots

11.55 Inches (mm)


(293)
Dim. Small Diameter Medium Diameter Large Diameter Enlarged (standard)
1.75 (45) - SST
A 0.88 (22.5) 1.25 (31.75) 1.62 (41.1)
1.92 (49) - HC and Monel
B 0.31 (8) 0.38 (10) maximum 0.50 (13) max. 0.63 (16) maximum
Mounting
Flange C 4.08 (100) 6.05 (153) 6.05 (153) 6.05 (153)
D 0.15 (4) 0.30 (8) 0.30 (8) 0.30 (8)
Probe
Insertion E 3.78 (96) 5.45 (138) 5.45 (138) 5.45 (138)
Length
F 1.25 (31.75) — — —

Model 7yS
with flanged connection

76 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.6.7 Physical Specifications – Caged Probes
3.38 4.18
(86) (106)
inches (mm)
3.38 4.18
(86) (106) 3.77
3.38 4.18
(96)
(86) (106)

3.77
9.30
3.77 (96)
(236)
(96)
9.30
9.30 (236)
(236) 45°
2 cable
entries

2 cable 45°
2 cable 45° entries
entries

10.45
4.70 6.39
(265)
(119) (162)

Mounting
Flange
Mounting
Flange
Mounting
Flange
Probe
Insertion Probe
Length Insertion Probe
Length Insertion
Length

Model 7yG Model 7yL Model 7yJ


with flanged connection with flanged connection with flanged connection

Cage Size Probe Rod Diameter (D) Spacer Length (L)

2" 0.5 to 0.75" (13 to 19 mm) 1.82" (46 mm)

3" 0.75 to 1.13" (19 to 29 mm) 2.64" (67 mm)

4" 1.05 to 1.50" (27 to 38 mm) 3.60" (91 mm)

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 77


3.6.8 Physical Specifications – Single Cable Flexible Probes
3.38 4.18 3.38 4.18
inches (mm) (86) (106) (86) (106)
3.38 4.18
(86) (106)
3.77 3.77
(96) (96)
3.77
(96)
9.30 9.30
(236) (236)
9.30
(236)

2 cable 45° 2 cable 45°


entries entries
2 cable 45°
entries

4.53
(115)
10.45 10.45
Mounting (265) (265)
Flange

Mounting
Flange Mounting
Flange
Probe
Insertion
Length
⌀ 2.0 (51)
⌀ 2.0 (51) ⌀ 2.0 (51)
⌀ 0.5 (0.19) 3.88
(99) Probe Probe
Insertion Insertion
Length Length
0.75 (19)
Model 7y3 6.0 Model 7y6 6.0
with flanged (152) with flanged (152)
Model 7y1 connection connection
with flanged connection

3.38 4.18
3.38 4.18 (86) (106)
(86) (106)

3.77
3.77 (96)
(96)
9.30
9.30 (236)
(236)
6
(152)
Ø2
2 cable 45°
(51)
2 cable 45° entries
entries

5.46
4.70 (139)
(119)
Mounting Mounting
Flange Flange

7y2: SST Weight


5 lbs (2.25 kg)
⌀ 2.0 (51) ⌀ 2.0 (51)
Probe Probe
Insertion Insertion
Length Length
6.0 Model 7y2 6.0
Model 7y4 (152) with flanged (152)
with flanged
connection
connection

78 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.6.9 Physical Specifications – Single Rod Rigid Probes
3.38 4.18
inches (mm) (86) (106)
3.38 4.18
3.38 4.18 (86) (106)
(86) (106) 3.77
(96)
3.77
3.77 (96)
9.30
(96) (236)
9.30
9.30 (236)
(236)

2 cable 45°
entries
2 cable 45°
2 cable 45° entries
entries

4.53
(115) 10.45
8.38 (265)
Mounting (213)
Flange

Mounting
Flange Mounting
Probe Flange
Insertion
Length
⌀ .38 ⌀ .38 ⌀ .50
Probe Probe
Insertion Insertion
(9.6) (9.6) Length (13)
Length

Model 7yF Model 7yM Model 7yN


with flanged connection with flanged connection with flanged connection

3.6.10 Physical Specifications – Twin Cable Flexible Probes


3.38 4.18
inches (mm) (86) (106)
3.38 4.18
(86) (106)
3.77
(96)
3.77
(96)
9.30
6.00
(236)
(152) 9.30
(236)
Ø 2.00
(51)
2 cable 45°
entries
2 cable 45°
entries
5.31
(135)
4.54
7y5: SST Weight
(115)
5 lbs (2.25 kg) Mounting
order code: 004-8778-002 Flange Mounting
+ 2 x 010-1731-001 Flange

Probe
Insertion Probe
Length Insertion
0.875 (22.2) Length

Ø 0.50 (13) Rods


0.248 (6.3)

Twin Cable GWR Probe Model 7y5 Model 7y7


end view with flanged connection with flanged connection

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 79


3.6.11 Power Supply Requirements

3.6.11.1 Safe Operating Area

Safe Operating Area

R Loop

591
Ω
Typical HART
4-20 mA
Digital Solar Mode Operating Area

0 11 V 16.25 V 24 V 36 V

Vsupply

3.6.11.2 Supply Voltage

Operational Mode Current Consumption Vmin Vmax

HART

4mA 16.25V 36V


General Purpose
20mA 11V 36V

4mA 16.25V 28.6V


Intrinsically Safe
20mA 11V 28.6V

4mA 16.25V 36V


Explosion Proof
20mA 11V 36V

Fixed Current-Solar Power Operation (PV transmitter via HART)


General Purpose 10mA¿ 11V 36V

Intrinsically Safe 10mA¿ 11V 28.6V

HART Multi-Drop Mode (Fixed Current)


Standard 4mA¿ 16.25V 36V

Intrinsically Safe 4mA¿ 16.25V 28.6V

FOUNDATION fieldbus™ / PROFIBUS PA


Supply Voltage 9V to 17.5V 9V to 17.5V 9V to 17.5V

¿ Start-up current 12 mA minimum.

80 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.7 Model Number

3.7.1 Transmitter
1 2 3 | BASIC MODEL NUMBER
706 ECLIPSE 4th Generation Guided Wave Radar (GWR) Level Transmitter

4 | POWER
5 24 VDC, Two-Wire

5 | SIGNAL OUTPUT
1 4 –20 mA with HART
2 FOUNDATION fieldbus™ Communication
3 PROFIBUS PA Communication
4 Modbus Communication (8th Digit = 0 or 3 only)

6 | SAFETY OPTIONS
0 None (FOUNDATION fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA or Modbus) (5th digit = 2, 3 or 4)
2 SIL 2/3 Certified - HART only (5th digit = 1)

7 | ACCESSORIES/MOUNTING
0 No Digital Display or Keypad - Integral
1 No Digital Display or Keypad - 3-foot (1 meter) remote
2 No Digital Display or Keypad - 12-foot (3.6 meter) remote
A Digital Display and Keypad - Integral
B Digital Display and Keypad - 3-foot (1 meter) remote
C Digital Display and Keypad - 12-foot (3.6 meter) remote

8 | CLASSIFICATION
0 General Purpose, Weatherproof (IP 67)
1 Intrinsically Safe (FM & CSA CL 1 Div 1, Grps A, B, C, D)
3 Explosion-proof (FM & CSA CL 1 Div 1, Grps B, C, D)
A Intrinsically Safe (ATEX/IEC Ex ia IIC T4)
B Flame-proof (ATEX/IEC Ex d ia IIC T6)
Non-sparking (ATEX Ex n IIC T6) /
C
Non-incendive (FM & CSA, CL 1 Div 2)
D Dust Ex (ATEX II)

9 | HOUSING
1 Die-cast Aluminum, Dual-compartment, 45-degree
2 Investment Cast, Stainless Steel, Dual-compartment, 45-degree

10 | CONDUIT CONNECTION
1
0 ⁄ " NPT
2

1 M20
1
2 ⁄ " NPT with sunshade
2

3 M20 with sunshade

7 0 6 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 81


3.7.2 Enlarged Coaxial Probe
1 | TECHNOLOGY
7 ECLIPSE GWR Probes - Model 706
2 | MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
A English
C Metric

3 | CONFIGURATION/STYLE (RIGID)
D Enlarged Coaxial, High Temp/High Pressure: Overfill w/Glass Seal (+850 °F/+450 °C) — Only available with 10th digit N or D
P Enlarged Coaxial, High Pressure: Overfill w/Glass Seal (+400 °F/+200 °C) — Only available with 10th digit N or D
T Enlarged Coaxial, Overfill Standard O-Ring Seal (+400 °F/+200 °C) — NOT available with 10th digit N or D

4 5 | PROCESS CONNECTION – SIZE/TYPE (consult factory for other process connections)


Threaded
41 2" NPT Thread ¿ 42 2" BSP (G1) Thread ¿
ASME Flanges
43 2" 150# ASME RF ¿ 5M 3" 1500# ASME RTJ
44 2" 300# ASME RF ¿ 5N 3" 2500# ASME RTJ
45 2" 600# ASME RF ¿ 63 4" 150# ASME RF
4K 2" 600# ASME RTJ ¿ 64 4" 300# ASME RF
53 3" 150# ASME RF 65 4" 600# ASME RF
54 3" 300# ASME RF 66 4" 900# ASME RF
55 3" 600# ASME RF 67 4" 1500# ASME RF
56 3" 900# ASME RF 68 4" 2500# ASME RF
57 3" 1500# ASME RF 6K 4" 600# ASME RTJ
58 3" 2500# ASME RF 6L 4" 900# ASME RTJ
5K 3" 600# ASME RTJ 6M 4" 1500# ASME RTJ
5L 3" 900# ASME RTJ 6N 4" 2500# ASME RTJ
EN Flanges
DA DN 50, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ¿ EH DN 80, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DB DN 50, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ¿ EJ DN 80, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DD DN 50, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¿ FA DN 100, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
DE DN 50, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¿ FB DN 100, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
EA DN 80, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A FD DN 100, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
EB DN 80, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A FE DN 100, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
ED DN 80, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FF DN 100, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
EE DN 80, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FG DN 100, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
EF DN 80, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FH DN 100, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
EG DN 80, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FJ DN 100, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
Torque Tube Mating Flanges ¡
TT 600# Fisher (249B/259B) in carbon steel
TU 600# Fisher (249C) in stainless steel
UT 600# Masoneilan flange in carbon steel
UU 600# Masoneilan flange in stainless steel
¿ Confirm mounting conditions/nozzle diameter to ensure sufficient clearance.
¡ Always check dimensions if ANSI/EN flanges are not used.

7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

82 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.7.2 Enlarged Coaxial Probe continued
6 | CONSTRUCTION CODES
0 Industrial
K ASME B31.1
L ASME B31.3
M ASME B31.3 & NACE MR0175/MR0103
N NACE MR0175/MR0103

7 | FLANGE OPTIONS — Offset flanges are only available with small coaxial probes
0 None

8 | MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION - FLANGE/NUT/ROD/INSULATION


A 316 SS/316L SS (Probe O.D. 1.75” (45mm))
B Hastelloy C (Probe O.D. 1.93” (49mm))
C Monel (Probe O.D. 1.93” (49mm))
R 316 SS/316L SS with Carbon Steel Flange (Probe O.D. 1.75” (45 mm))
S Hastelloy C with Carbon Steel Flange (Probe O.D. 1.93” (49mm))
T Monel with Carbon Steel Flange (Probe O.D. 1.93” (49mm))

9 | SPACER MATERIAL
1 TFE (+400 °F/+200 °C) — Only available with 3rd digit P or T — εr ≥ 1.4
2 PEEK HT — Only available with 3rd digit D (+650 °F/+345 °C) — εr ≥ 1.4
3 Ceramic (High Temp. >+800 °F/+425 °C) — Only available with 3rd digit D — εr ≥ 2.0
4 Celazole (+800 °F/+425 °C) — Only available with 3rd digit D — εr ≥ 1.4
5 None - with metal shorting rod — εr ≥ 1.4 — Future

10 | O-RING MATERIALS/SEAL OPTIONS


0 Viton® GFLT — Only available with 3rd digit T
2 Kalrez 4079 — Only available with 3rd digit T
8 Aegis PF 128 (NACE) — Only available with 3rd digit T
A Kalrez 6375 — Only available with 3rd digit T
B HF Acid Probe — Only available with 3rd digit T and 8th digit C
None/Glass Ceramic Alloy (Dual Seal Design with annunciator fitting)
D
Only available with 3rd digit D or P
N None/Glass Ceramic Alloy — Only available with 3rd digit D or P

11 | PROBE SIZE/ELEMENT TYPE/FLUSHING CONNECTION


0 Standard Enlarged Coaxial Probe
1 Standard Enlarged Coaxial Probe with Flushing Port

12 | SPECIAL OPTIONS — See page 94


0 Single Length Probe (Non-Segmented)
1 1-piece Enlarged Segmented Probe OD=2.5”(64mm)
2 2-piece Enlarged Segmented Probe OD=2.5”(64mm)
3 3-piece Enlarged Segmented Probe OD=2.5”(64mm)
4 4-piece Enlarged Segmented Probe OD=2.5”(64mm)
5 5-piece Enlarged Segmented Probe OD=2.5"(64mm)
6 6-piece Enlarged Segmented Probe OD=2.5"(64mm)

13 14 15 | INSERTION LENGTH
inches (012 – 396)
XXX cm (030 – 999)

unit of measure determined by


2nd digit of model number

7 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 83


3.7.3 Small Coaxial Probe
1 | TECHNOLOGY
7 ECLIPSE GWR Probes - Model 706
2 | MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
A English
C Metric
3 | CONFIGURATION/STYLE (RIGID)
D Small Coaxial, High Temp/High Pressure: Overfill w/Glass Seal (+850 °F/+450 °C) — Only available with 10th digit N or D
P Small Coaxial, High Pressure: Overfill w/Glass Seal (+400 °F/+200 °C) — Only available with 10th digit N or D
S Small Coaxial, Saturated Steam +575/650 °F (+300/345 °C), Max. Length = 240” (610 cm) — Only available with 10th digit N, 9th digit 2 or 3
T Small Coaxial, Overfill Standard O-Ring Seal (+400 °F/+200 °C) — NOT available with 10th digit N or D
4 5 | PROCESS CONNECTION – SIZE/TYPE (consult factory for other process connections)
Threaded
4⁄ " NPT Thread ¬ 1" BSP (G1) Thread ¬
3
11 22
ASME Flanges
2 3 1" 150# ASME RF ¿ √ 3 8 11⁄2" 2500# ASME RF √ 5 3 3" 150# ASME RF 6 3 4" 150# ASME RF
2 4 1" 300# ASME RF ¿ √ 3 N 11⁄2" 2500# ASME RTJ √ 5 4 3" 300# ASME RF 6 4 4" 300# ASME RF
2 5 1" 600# ASME RF ¿ √ 4 3 2" 150# ASME RF 5 5 3" 600# ASME RF 6 5 4" 600# ASME RF
2 K 1" 600# ASME RTJ ¿ √ 4 4 2" 300# ASME RF 5 6 3" 900# ASME RF 6 6 4" 900# ASME RF
3 3 11⁄2" 150# ASME RF √ 4 5 2" 600# ASME RF 5 7 3" 1500# ASME RF 6 7 4" 1500# ASME RF
3 4 11⁄2" 300# ASME RF √ 4 7 2" 900/1500# ASME RF 5 8 3" 2500# ASME RF 6 8 4" 2500# ASME RF
3 5 11⁄2" 600# ASME RF √ 4 8 2" 2500# ASME RF 5 K 3" 600# ASME RTJ 6 K 4" 600# ASME RTJ
3 K 11⁄2" 600# ASME RTJ √ 4 K 2" 600# ASME RTJ 5 L 3" 900# ASME RTJ 6 L 4" 900# ASME RTJ
3 7 1 ⁄2" 900/1500# ASME RF√ 4 M 2" 900/1500# ASME RTJ 5 M 3" 1500# ASME RTJ
1
6 M 4" 1500# ASME RTJ
3 M 11⁄2" 900/1500# ASME RTJ√ 4 N 2" 2500# ASME RTJ 5 N 3" 2500# ASME RTJ 6 N 4" 2500# ASME RTJ
EN Flanges
BB DN 25, PN 16/25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ¿ ¬ EA DN 80, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
BC DN 25, PN 63/100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¿ ¬ EB DN 80, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
CB DN 40, PN 16/25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ¬ ED DN 80, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
CC DN 40, PN 63/100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¬ EE DN 80, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
CF DN 40, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¬ EF DN 80, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
CG DN 40, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¬ EG DN 80, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
CH DN 40, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¬ EH DN 80, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
CJ DN 40, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¬ E J DN 80, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DA DN 50, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A FA DN 100, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
DB DN 50, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A FB DN 100, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
DD DN 50, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FD DN 100, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DE DN 50, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FE DN 100, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DF DN 50, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FF DN 100, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DG DN 50, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FG DN 100, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DH DN 50, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FH DN 100, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DJ DN 50, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FJ DN 100, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
Torque Tube Mating Flanges ¡
TT 600# Fisher (249B/259B) in carbon steel
TU 600# Fisher (249C) in stainless steel
UT 600# Masoneilan flange in carbon steel
UU 600# Masoneilan flange in stainless steel
¿ Confirm mounting conditions/nozzle diameter to ensure sufficient clearance.
¡ Always check dimensions if ASME/EN flanges are not used.
¬ Not available with 3rd Digit D
√ Not available with 3rd Digit D or P

7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

84 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.7.3 Small Coaxial Probe continued
6 | CONSTRUCTION CODES
0 Industrial
K ASME B31.1 — NOT available with 4th digits T or U
L ASME B31.3
M ASME B31.3 & NACE MR0175/MR0103 — NOT available with carbon steel flange
N NACE MR0175/MR0103 — NOT available with carbon steel flange

7 | FLANGE OPTIONS — Offset flanges are available only with small coaxial probes
0 None
1 Offset (For use with AURORA) — 4” Available only with 3rd digit P, S or T
2 Offset with 1⁄2" NPT Vent (For use with AURORA) — 4” Available only with 3rd digit P, S or T
3 Offset with 3⁄4" NPT Vent (For use with AURORA) — 4” Available only with 3rd digit P, S or T

8 | MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION - FLANGE/NUT/ROD/INSULATION


A 316 SS/316L SS
B Hastelloy C
C Monel — NOT available with 3rd digit S
R 316 SS/316L SS with Carbon Steel Flange
S Hastelloy C with Carbon Steel Flange
T Monel with Carbon Steel Flange — NOT available with 3rd digit S

9 | SPACER MATERIAL
1 TFE (+400 °F/+200 °C) — Available only with 3rd digit P or T — εr ≥ 1.4
2 PEEK HT — Available only with 3rd digit D — εr ≥ 1.4 (+650 °F/+345 °C) or S (+575 °F/+300 °C)
3 Ceramic (Temp. >+650 °F/+345 °C) — Available only with 3rd digit D with εr ≥ 2.0 or with 3rd digit S *
5 None - Single bottom metal spacer — Available only with 3rd digit S *
* Not available with 5th digit 1 or 2.

10 | O-RING MATERIALS/SEAL OPTIONS


0 Viton® GFLT — Available only with 3rd digit T
2 Kalrez® 4079 — Available only with 3rd digit T
8 Aegis PF 128 (NACE) — Available only with 3rd digit T
A Kalrez 6375 — Available only with 3rd digit T
B HF Acid Probe — Available only with 3rd digit T and 8th digit C
D None/Glass Ceramic Alloy (dual-seal design with annunciator fitting)—Available only with 3rd digit D or P
N None/Glass Ceramic Alloy — Available only with 3rd digit D, P or S

11 | PROBE SIZE/ELEMENT TYPE/FLUSHING CONNECTION


2 Small Coaxial (0.875 inches/22 mm)
A Medium Coaxial (1.25 inches/32 mm) ƒ
B Large Coaxial (1.62 inches/42 mm) ≈
ƒ

96 inches (244 cm) maximum length
120 inches (305 cm) maximum length

12 | SPECIAL OPTIONS
0 Single Length Probe (Non-Segmented)

13 14 15 | INSERTION LENGTH
inches (012 – 240)
XXX cm (030 – 610)
unit of measure determined by
2nd digit of model number

7 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 85


3.7.4 Caged Probe
1 | TECHNOLOGY
7 ECLIPSE GWR Probes - Model 706

2 | MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
A English
C Metric

3 | CONFIGURATION/STYLE (RIGID)
G Overfill Caged Rigid Probe for use in chambers +400 °F (+200 °C) — Only available with 2", 3" and 4" flanges
Overfill Caged High Temp/High Pressure Probe with Glass Seal for use in chambers +850 °F (+450 °C)
J
Only available with 2", 3" and 4" flanges
Overfill Caged High Pressure Probe with Glass Seal for use in chambers +400 °F (+200 °C)
L
Only available with 2", 3" and 4" flanges

4 5 | PROCESS CONNECTION – SIZE/TYPE (consult factory for other process connections) ¿


ASME Flanges
43 2" 150# ASME RF 54 3" 300# ASME RF 63 4" 150# ASME RF
44 2" 300# ASME RF 55 3" 600# ASME RF 64 4" 300# ASME RF
45 2" 600# ASME RF 56 3" 900# ASME RF 65 4" 600# ASME RF
47 2" 900/1500# ASME RF 57 3" 1500# ASME RF 66 4" 900# ASME RF
48 2" 2500# ASME RF 58 3" 2500# ASME RF 67 4" 1500# ASME RF
4K 2" 600# ASME RTJ 5K 3" 600# ASME RTJ 68 4" 2500# ASME RF
4M 2" 900/1500# ASME RTJ 5L 3" 900# ASME RTJ 6K 4" 600# ASME RTJ
4N 2" 2500# ASME RTJ 5M 3" 1500# ASME RTJ 6L 4" 900# ASME RTJ
53 3" 150# ASME RF 5N 3" 2500# ASME RTJ 6M 4" 1500# ASME RTJ
6N 4" 2500# ASME RTJ
EN Flanges
DA DN 50, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A EF DN 80, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DB DN 50, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A EG DN 80, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DD DN 50, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 EH DN 80, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DE DN 50, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 E J DN 80, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DF DN 50, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FA DN 100, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
DG DN 50, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FB DN 100, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
DH DN 50, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FD DN 100, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DJ DN 50, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FE DN 100, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
EA DN 80, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A FF DN 100, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
EB DN 80, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A FG DN 100, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
ED DN 80, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FH DN 100, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
EE DN 80, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FJ DN 100, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2

Torque Tube Mating Flanges ¡


TT 600# Fisher (249B/259B) in carbon steel
TU 600# Fisher (249C) in stainless steel
UT 600# Masoneilan flange in carbon steel
UU 600# Masoneilan flange in stainless steel
¿ Confirm mounting conditions/nozzle diameter to ensure sufficient clearance.
¡ Always check dimensions if ASME/EN flanges are not used.

7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

86 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.7.4 Caged Probe continued
6 | CONSTRUCTION CODES
0 Industrial
K ASME B31.1
L ASME B31.3
M ASME B31.3 & NACE MR0175/MR0103
N NACE MR0175/MR0103

7 | FLANGE OPTIONS
0 None
1 Offset (For use with AURORA)–4” Only available with 3rd digit G and J and 4th digit 6
2 Offset with 12⁄ " NPT Vent (For use with AURORA)–4” Only available with 3rd digit G and J and 4th digit 6
3 Offset with 34⁄ " NPT Vent (For use with AURORA)–4” Only available with 3rd digit G and J and 4th digit 6

8 | MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION - MFG/NUT/ROD/INSULATION


A 316 SS/316L SS
B Hastelloy C
C Monel
R 316 SS/316L SS with Carbon Steel Flange
S Hastelloy C with Carbon Steel Flange
T Monel with Carbon Steel Flange

9 | SPACER MATERIAL
2 PEEK HT (+650 °F/+345 °C)
3 Ceramic (High Temp.>+800 °F/+425 °C) — Only available with 3rd digit J
4 Celazole® (+800 °F/+425 °C) — Only available with 3rd digit J

10 | O-RING MATERIALS/SEAL OPTIONS


0 Viton® GFLT — NOT available with 3rd digit J or L
2 Kalrez 4079 — NOT available with 3rd digit J or L
8 Aegis PF 128 (NACE) — NOT available with 3rd digit J or L
A Kalrez 6375 — NOT available with 3rd digit J or L
B HF Acid Probe — Only available with 3rd digit G and 8th digit C
None/Glass Ceramic Alloy (Dual Seal Design with annunciator
D
fitting) — NOT available with 3rd digit G
N None/Glass Ceramic Alloy — NOT available with 3rd digit G

11 | PROBE SIZE/ELEMENT TYPE/FLUSHING CONNECTION


0 None

12 | SPECIAL OPTIONS — See page 94


1 Single Length Removable Probe
2 2-piece Segmented Probe
3 3-piece Segmented Probe
4 4-piece Segmented Probe

13 14 15 | INSERTION LENGTH
inches (012 – 288)
XXX cm (030 – 732)
unit of measure determined by
2nd digit of model number

7 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 87


3.7.5 Single Rod Rigid Probe
1 | TECHNOLOGY
7 ECLIPSE GWR Probes - Model 706

2 | MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
A English
C Metric

3 | CONFIGURATION/STYLE (RIGID)
F Single Rod, Standard (+400 °F/200 °C) for in-tank applications NOT available with 10th digit N or D
M Single Rod, High Pressure Probe with glass seal (+400 °F/+200 °C), for in-tank applications Only available with 10th digit N or D
N Single Rod, High Temp/High Pressure with glass seal (+850 °F/+450 °C), for in-tank applications Only available with 10th digit N or D

4 5 | PROCESS CONNECTION – SIZE/TYPE (consult factory for other process connections) ¿


Threaded
21 1" NPT Thread ¡ 22 1" BSP (G1) Thread ¡
41 2" NPT Thread 42 2" BSP (G1) Thread

ASME Flanges
33 112⁄ " 150# ASME RF ¿ ¬ 4N 2" 2500# ASME RTJ 5N 3" 2500# ASME RTJ
34 112⁄ " 300# ASME RF ¿ ¬ 53 3" 150# ASME RF 63 4" 150# ASME RF
35 112⁄ " 600# ASME RF ¿ ¬ 54 3" 300# ASME RF 64 4" 300# ASME RF
43 2" 150# ASME RF ¿ 55 3" 600# ASME RF 65 4" 600# ASME RF √
44 2" 300# ASME RF ¿ 56 3" 900# ASME RF 66 4" 900# ASME RF √
45 2" 600# ASME RF ¿ 57 3" 1500# ASME RF 67 4" 1500# ASME RF √
47 2" 900/1500# ASME RF 58 3" 2500# ASME RF 68 4" 2500# ASME RF √
48 2" 2500# ASME RF 5K 3" 600# ASME RTJ 6K 4" 600# ASME RTJ √
4K 2" 600# ASME RTJ 5L 3" 900# ASME RTJ 6L 4" 900# ASME RTJ √
4M 2" 900/1500# ASME RTJ 5M 3" 1500# ASME RTJ 6M 4" 1500# ASME RTJ √
6N 4" 2500# ASME RTJ √
EN Flanges
CB DN 40, PN 16/25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ED DN 80, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
CC DN 40, PN 63/100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 EE DN 80, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
CF DN 40, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 EF DN 80, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √
CG DN 40, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 EG DN 80, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √
DA DN 50, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ¿ EH DN 80, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √
DB DN 50, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ¿ E J DN 80, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √
DD DN 50, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¿ FA DN 100, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
DE DN 50, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¿ FB DN 100, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
DF DN 50, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √ FD DN 100, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DG DN 50, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √ FE DN 100, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DH DN 50, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √ FF DN 100, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √
DJ DN 50, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √ FG DN 100, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √
EA DN 80, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ¿ FH DN 100, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √
EB DN 80, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A FJ DN 100, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 √
¿ Confirm mounting conditions/nozzle diameter to ensure sufficient clearance.
¡ Not available with 3rd Digit N or 8th Digit P
¬ Not available with 3rd Digit M or N
√ Available only with 3rd Digit M or N

7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

88 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.7.5 Single Rigid Rod Probe continued
6 | CONSTRUCTION CODES
0 Industrial
K ASME B31.1
L ASME B31.3
M ASME B31.3 & NACE MR0175/MR0103
N NACE MR0175/MR0103

7 | FLANGE OPTIONS
0 None

8 | MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION - MFG/NUT/ROD/INSULATION


A 316 SS/316L SS
B Hastelloy C
C Monel
F Faced Flange, PFA coated wetted surfaces — Only available with Digit 3rd digit F
P PFA coated rod — Only available with Digit 3rd digit F
R 316 SS/316L SS with Carbon Steel Flange
S Hastelloy C with Carbon Steel Flange
T Monel with Carbon Steel Flange

9 | SPACER MATERIAL
0 None – NOT available with 3rd Digit N
2 PEEK HT (+650 °F/+345 °C) — Only available with 3rd digit N
3 Ceramic (High Temp.>+800 °F/+425 °C) — Only available with 3rd digit N
4 Celazole® (+800 °F/+425 °C) — Only available with 3rd digit N

10 | O-RING MATERIALS/SEAL OPTIONS


0 Viton® GFLT — NOT available with 3rd digit M or N
2 Kalrez 4079 — NOT available with 3rd digit M or N
8 Aegis PF 128 (NACE) — NOT available with 3rd digit M or N
A Kalrez 6375 — NOT available with 3rd digit M or N
None/Glass Ceramic Alloy Dual Seal with annunciator
D
fitting — NOT available with 3rd digit F
N None/Glass Ceramic Alloy Dual Seal — NOT available with 3rd digit F

11 | PROBE SIZE/ELEMENT TYPE/FLUSHING CONNECTION


0 Standard Single Rod

12 | SPECIAL OPTIONS
Non-Removable Rod
0
Only available with PFA Coated Probes(8th digit F or P)
Removable Rod
1
NOT available with PFA Coated Probes(8th Digit F or P)

13 14 15 | INSERTION LENGTH
inches (012 – 288)
cm (030 – 732)
XXX
maximum 240 inches (610 cm)
when 8th digit = F or P

unit of measure determined by


2nd digit of model number

7 0 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 89


3.7.6 Single Cable Flexible Probe
1 | TECHNOLOGY
7 ECLIPSE GWR Probes - Model 706

2 | MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
A English
C Metric

3 | SPECIALTY FLEXIBLE PROBES


1 Single Cable Flexible standard for in-tank applications (+400 °F/+200 °C)
2 Single Cable Flexible Light Duty Bulk Solids
3 Single Cable Flexible HTHP for in-tank applications (+850 °F/+450 °C)
4 Single Cable Flexible standard for chamber applications (+400 °F/+200 °C) — (Future)
6 Single Cable Flexible HTHP for chamber applications (+850 °F/+450 °C)

4 5 | PROCESS CONNECTION – SIZE/TYPE (consult factory for other process connections)


Threaded
41 2" NPT Thread (not available with the 7y6) 42 2" BSP (G1) Thread (not available with the 7y6)

ASME Flanges
43 2" 150# ASME RF ¿ 53 3" 150# ASME RF 63 4" 150# ASME RF
44 2" 300# ASME RF ¿ 54 3" 300# ASME RF 64 4" 300# ASME RF
45 2" 600# ASME RF ¿ 55 3" 600# ASME RF 65 4" 600# ASME RF
47 2" 900/1500# ASME RF 56 3" 900# ASME RF 66 4" 900# ASME RF ¡
48 2" 2500# ASME RF 57 3" 1500# ASME RF 67 4" 1500# ASME RF ¡
4K 2" 600# ASME RTJ 58 3" 2500# ASME RF 68 4" 2500# ASME RF ¡
4M 2" 900/1500# ASME RTJ 5K 3" 600# ASME RTJ 6K 4" 600# ASME RTJ ¡
4N 2" 2500# ASME RTJ 5L 3" 900# ASME RTJ 6L 4" 900# ASME RTJ ¡
5M 3" 1500# ASME RTJ 6M 4" 1500# ASME RTJ ¡
5N 3" 2500# ASME RTJ 6N 4" 2500# ASME RTJ ¡
EN Flanges
DA DN 50, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ¿ EF DN 80, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡
DB DN 50, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ¿ EG DN 80, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡
DD DN 50, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¿ EH DN 80, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡
DE DN 50, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¿ E J DN 80, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡
DF DN 50, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡ FA DN 100, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
DG DN 50, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡ FB DN 100, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
DH DN 50, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡ FD DN 100, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
DJ DN 50, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡ FE DN 100, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
EA DN 80, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A ¿ FF DN 100, PN 160 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡
EB DN 80, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A FG DN 100, PN 250 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡
ED DN 80, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FH DN 100, PN 320 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡
EE DN 80, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 FJ DN 100, PN 400 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2 ¡
¿ Confirm mounting conditions/nozzle diameter to ensure sufficient clearance.
¡ Only available with 3rd Digit 3 or 6

7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

90 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.7.6 Single Flexible Cable Probe continued

6 | CONSTRUCTION CODES
0 Industrial

7 | FLANGE OPTIONS
0 None

8 | MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION - MFG/NUT/ROD/INSULATION


A 316 SS/316L SS
F Faced Flange, PFA Coated Wetted Surfaces — Only available with 3rd digit 1
R 316 SS/316L SS with Carbon Steel Flange

9 | SPACER/WEIGHT MATERIAL
0 No Spacer — Not available with 3rd digit 3
1 PTFE Spacer — Available only with 3rd digit 3
4 Celazole® Spacer — Available only with 3rd digit 6
5 Metal Weight — Available only with 3rd digit 3

10 | O-RING MATERIALS/SEAL OPTIONS


0 Viton® GFLT
2 Kalrez 4079
8 Aegis PF 128 (NACE)
A Kalrez 6375
Glass Ceramic Alloy Dual Seal with annunciator fitting —
D
Available only with 3rd digit 3 or 6
N None/Glass Ceramic Alloy Dual Seal – Available only with 3rd digit 3 or 6

11 | PROBE SIZE/ELEMENT TYPE/FLUSHING CONNECTION


3 Flexible Cable Probe

12 | SPECIAL OPTIONS
Non-removable Probe Cable
0
Only available with 3rd digit 2 or 8th digit F
Removable Single-piece Probe Cable
1
Only available with 3rd digit 1, 3 and 6

13 14 15 | INSERTION LENGTH
feet (003 – 100)
XXX meters (001 – 030)
unit of measure determined by
2nd digit of model number

7 0 0 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 91


3.7.7 Twin Cable Flexible Probe
1 | TECHNOLOGY
7 ECLIPSE GWR Probes - Model 706

2 | MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
A English
C Metric

3 | SPECIALTY FLEXIBLE PROBES


5 Twin Flexible Light Duty Bulk Solids with FEP Webbing
7 Twin Flexible - 316 SS with FEP Webbing

4 5 | PROCESS CONNECTION – SIZE/TYPE (consult factory for other process connections)


Threaded ¿
21 1" NPT Thread (7yF and 7yM only) 22 1" BSP (G1) Thread (7yF and 7yM only)
41 2" NPT Thread 42 2" BSP (G1) Thread

ASME Flanges
53 3" 150 lbs. ASME RF
54 3" 300 lbs. ASME RF
55 3" 600 lbs. ASME RF
63 4" 150 lbs. ASME RF
64 4" 300 lbs. ASME RF
65 4" 600 lbs. ASME RF

EN Flanges
EA DN 80, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
EB DN 80, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
ED DN 80, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
EE DN 80, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
FA DN 100, PN 16 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
FB DN 100, PN 25/40 EN 1092-1 TYPE A
FD DN 100, PN 63 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
FE DN 100, PN 100 EN 1092-1 TYPE B2
¿ Confirm mounting conditions/nozzle diameter to ensure sufficient clearance.

7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

92 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.7.7 Twin Flexible Cable Probe continued

6 | CONSTRUCTION CODES
0 Industrial

7 | FLANGE OPTIONS
0 None

8 | MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION - MFG/NUT/ROD/INSULATION


A 316 SS/316L SS
R 316 SS/316L SS with Carbon Steel Flange

9 | SPACER MATERIAL
0 None

10 | O-RING MATERIALS/SEAL OPTIONS


0 Viton® GFLT
2 Kalrez 4079 — Only available with 3rd digit 7
8 Aegis PF 128 (NACE) — Only available with 3rd digit 7
A Kalrez 6375 — Only available with 3rd digit 7

11 | PROBE SIZE/ELEMENT TYPE/FLUSHING CONNECTION


3 Flexible Cable Probe

12 | SPECIAL OPTIONS
0 None

13 14 15 | INSERTION LENGTH
feet (003 – 100)
XXX meters (001 – 030)
unit of measure determined by
2nd digit of model number

7 0 0 0 3 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 93


3.7.8 Segmented Probe Options
12th Digit of Model Number

One Two Three Four Five Six


Probe Model Segment Segments Segments Segments Segments Segments

Coaxial Models
7yD, 7yP and 7yT
24 – 72" 48 – 144" 72 – 216" 96 – 288" 120 – 360" 144 – 396"
(Enlarged versions only)
(60 – 182 cm) (120 – 365 cm) (180 – 548 cm) (240 – 731 cm) (305 – 914 cm) (365 – 999 cm)
(3", DN 80 Process
Connections and larger)

Caged Models 12 – 120" 24 – 240" 36 – 288" 48 – 288"


Not Available Not Available
7yG, 7yL and 7yJ (30 – 305 cm) (60 – 610 cm) (90 – 732 cm) (120 – 732 cm)

NOTE: Segments will be evenly divided over the length of the probe.

94 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


3.8 Parts
3.8.1 Replacement Parts

5
7

TB1

J1
- +
3 6
CURRENT LOOP
R

1
4
R

Electronics:
Digit: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Part Number: 7 0 6 5 Serial Number: 7 7 7 7 0 6 7 7 7 7 7
X = product with a non-standard customer requirement See nameplate, always provide complete part number and
serial number when ordering spares.

(1) Electronic Module Replacement Part


Digit 5 Digit 6 Replacement Part (4) O-ring 012-2201-237
1 2 Z31-2849-001 (5) O-ring 012-2201-237
2 0 Z31-2849-002
3 0 Z31-2858-001 (6) Housing Cover
4 0 Z31-2849-001 Digit 7 Digit 8 Digit 9 Replacement Part
1 004-9225-002
0, 1 or 2 all
(2) Display Module 2 004-9225-003
Digit 5 Digit 7 Replacement Part 0, 1 or A 036-4413-005
1
0, 1 or 2 N/A A, B or C 3, B, C or D 036-4413-001
1, 2, 3 or 4
A, B or C Z31-2850-001 all 2 036-4413-002

(3) Wiring PC Board (7) Housing Cover


Digit 5 Digit 6 Replacement Part Digit 9 Replacement Part
1 2 Z30-9165-001 1 004-9225-002
2 or 3 0 Z30-9166-002 2 004-9225-003
4 0 Z31-2859-001

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 95


Probe:
Digit: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Part Number: 7
X = product with a non-standard customer requirement

Bottom Spacer for Single Rod GWR Probe (8) Bottom Spacer + Pin Kit
Digit 3 Digit 8 Replacement Part
A or R 089-9114-008

F or M B or S 089-9114-009

C or T 089-9114-010

A or R 089-9114-005

N B or S 089-9114-006
7yF, 7yM or 7yN single rod
C or T 089-9114-007

Cable Weight for Flexible GWR Probe

(9) Cable Weight Assembly

Digit 3 Replacement Part


1 089-9120-001

7 089-9121-001
➈ ➈

7y1 single cable 7y7 twin cable

(10) Cable Weight

Digit 3 Replacement Part


➉ ➉ 2 004-8778-001

5 004-8778-002

11
(11) Cable Clamp
11
Digit 3 Replacement Part

010-1731-001
2 or 5
(ordering quantity: 2)
7y2 single cable 7y5 twin cable

96 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


4.0 Advanced Configuration/
Troubleshooting Techniques
This section contains information regarding some of the
advanced configuration and troubleshooting capability con-
tained within the Model 706 transmitter. These diagnostic
options are best suited for use with PACTware and the
Model 706 DTM, and should be implemented only after
contacting MAGNETROL Technical Support.

4.1 End-of-Probe Analysis (EOPA)

Note that due to the operation of this method, End of


Probe Analysis cannot be applied with interface measure-
ment, applications with a "water" bottoms, or with stratify-
ing liquids. Therefore, EOPA will not be available when
Measurement Type = Interface & Level.
When EOPA is enabled and the calculated (inferred level) is
being used, a diagnostic warning shown as "Inferred Level”
will be present.

4.1.1 Enable EOPA using PACTware


Click on the Device Setup tab, and then select Advanced
Config. In the lower left corner select the correct Polarity
for the End of Probe pulse, then turn on the EoP Analysis.
The Eop Dielectric box will then appear. Fill in the correct
Dielectric of the process medium being measured.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 97


4.1.2 Enable EOPA using keypad/LCD

From the MAIN MENU, select DEVICE SETUP and


press Enter.

Scroll down to Advanced Config, and then press Enter.

Scroll down to END of PROBE ANALYSIS, and then press


Enter.

98 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


Enter the correct polarity for EoP Polarity, turn on EoP
Analysis, and then enter the correct value for EoP
Dielectric. EoP Dielectric is the dielectric constant of the
process medium being measured.

4.2 Sloped Threshold

The Sloped Threshold option contained in the Model 706


allows the user additional level detection capability by
allowing the threshold to be sloped (bent) around an
unwanted signal. The result is a convenient way to ignore
undesired signals.
The use of PACTware and the Model 706 DTM is recom-
mended for this option.
Using PACTware, click on the Device Setup tab, and then
select Advanced Config.
In the Threshold Settings section, select “Sloped” within in
the Lvl Tresh Mode dropdown box.
Then set the Sloped Start Value, Lvl Tresh Value, and
Sloped End Distance.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 99


100 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter
4.3 Echo Rejection

Another way to ignore unwanted signals along the length of


the probe is by utilizing the Echo Rejection feature.

Setup using PACTware

Select the Diagnostics tab and then the Echo Curve tab.
Then click on New Rejection Curve

Click on OK at the loop warning message.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 101


On the next screen, enter the actual process media location
and then hit OK.

A password window will then appear (unless the password


was previously entered). Enter the password and hit OK.
Then the system calculates the curve, and then saves it. Hit
OK to confirm.

A warning screen is then shown so that the loop can be


returned to automatic control.

At this point the echo rejection curve can be viewed by


selecting Rejection Curve as Curve 2 in the lower left corner
of the screen. The Rejection curve will then be displayed in
red as shown in the screenshot above.
Alternatively, you can follow the procedure below:
Select the Device Setup tab, and then select the Advanced
Config tab. Then click on New Rejection Curve.

102 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


You will get a warning regarding the loop, hit OK. On the
next screen you need to enter the actual media location and
then hit OK.

Next a password window might appear if not already


entered. Then the system calculates the curve, and then
saves it. Hit OK to confirm.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 103


A warning screen is shown that the loop can be returned to
automatic control.

At this point the echo rejection curve can be viewed by


selecting Rejection Curve as Curve 2 in the lower left corner
of the Echo Curve screen. The Rejection curve will then be
displayed in red as shown in the screenshot below.

4.4 Buildup Detection

A unique feature contained within the Model 706 can be


used to obtain an indication of build-up along the length of
the probe. This can be set as the HART SV or TV which
can be monitored in the control room. An algorithm com-
pares the buildup echo strength as compared to the Lvl
Thrsh Value, and outputs value in percent.

104 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


4.4.1 Buildup Detection Setup using PACTware

Buildup detection is a feature that needs to be turned on in


Advanced Config, see below.

Once turned on progress can be checked in the Advanced


Diagnostics screen, see below.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 105


4.4.2 Buildup Detection Setup using the Keypad

From the menu select DEVICE SETUP and hit Enter.

Scroll down to Buildup Detection and hit Enter

Select On and hit Enter

106 57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter


Checking buildup can be done from the main display
screen. First the unit must be set up to display the Buildup
percentage. Go to the main menu and select DEVICE
SETUP then hit Enter.

Scroll down to DISPLAY CONFIG and hit Enter.

Scroll down to Probe Buildup and hit Enter, then select


View. From the main screen the Buildup percentage is now
shown.

57-606 ECLIPSE Model 706 Guided Wave Radar Transmitter 107


ASSURED QUALITy & SERVICE COST LESS

Service Policy Return Material Procedure


Owners of MAGNETROL controls may request the So that we may efficiently process any materials that are
return of a control or any part of a control for complete returned, it is essential that a “Return Material
rebuilding or replacement. They will be rebuilt or replaced Authorization” (RMA) number be obtained from the
promptly. Controls returned under our service policy factory prior to the material’s return. This is available
must be returned by prepaid transportation. through a MAGNETROL local representative or by con-
MAGNETROL will repair or replace the control at no cost tacting the factory. Please supply the following information:
to the purchaser (or owner) other than transportation if:
1. Company Name
1. Returned within the warranty period; and 2. Description of Material
2. The factory inspection finds the cause of the claim to 3. Serial Number
be covered under the warranty. 4. Reason for Return
If the trouble is the result of conditions beyond our con- 5. Application
trol; or, is NOT covered by the warranty, there will be
Any unit that was used in a process must be properly
charges for labor and the parts required to rebuild or
cleaned in accordance with OSHA standards, before it is
replace the equipment.
returned to the factory.
In some cases it may be expedient to ship replacement
parts; or, in extreme cases a complete new control, to A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) must accompany
replace the original equipment before it is returned. If this material that was used in any media.
is desired, notify the factory of both the model and serial All shipments returned to the factory must be by prepaid
numbers of the control to be replaced. In such cases, credit transportation.
for the materials returned will be determined on the basis
of the applicability of our warranty. All replacements will be shipped F.O.B. factory.
No claims for misapplication, labor, direct or consequen-
tial damage will be allowed.

Maintenance Policy
With proper ECLIPSE Guided Wave Radar (GWR) probe selection, there is virtually no maintenance required for a
Model 706 system. As explained in Section 3.3.5, application-related issues, such as coating or bridging on the probe can
occur. Therefore, although internal diagnostics can be utilized to proactively display overall system degradation, a peri-
odic visual inspection of he probe is recommended. Refer to Section 3.8 for replacement parts.
24/7 Technical Support assistance is available at 1-630-723-6730 or fieldservice@magnetrol.com.

ECLIPSE Guided Wave Radar transmitters may be protected by one or more of the following U.S. Patent Nos. US 6,062,095:
US 6,247,362; US 6,588,272; US 6,626,038; US 6,640,629; US 6,642,807; US 6,690,320; US 6,750,808; US 6,801,157;
US 6,867,729; US 6,879,282; 6,906,662. May depend on model. Other patents pending.

705 Enterprise Street • Aurora, Illinois 60504-8149 • 630.969.4000


info@magnetrol.com • magnetrol.com

Copyright © 2018 Magnetrol International, Incorporated

Magnetrol & Magnetrol logotype, Orion Instruments & Orion Instruments logotype, ECLIPSE and MODULEVEL are
registered trademarks of Magnetrol International, Incorporated.
CSA logotype is a registered trademark of Canadian Standards Association.
Eckardt is a registered trademark of Invensys Process Systems.
Fisher is a registered trademark of Emerson Process Management.
FOUNDATION fieldbus logo is a registered trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation.
HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.
Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc.
Masoneilan is a registered trademark of Dresser Industries, Inc.
Monel is a registered trademark of International Nickel Co.
PACTware is trademark of PACTware Consortium.
Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont. BULLETIN: 57-606.10
Tokyo Keiso is a registered trademark of Tokyo Keiso Co., Ltd. EFFECTIVE: December 2018
Viton and Kalrez are registered trademarks of DuPont Performance Elastomers.
SUPERCEDES: March 2018

You might also like